JP2021159397A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably generating a plurality of kinds of advantageous game states advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: A time-shortening game state after a latent probability via winning is a game state to which a shift is made in selection of losing with time-shortening in a special pattern lottery during a latent probability variable game state. Therefore, game properties for smoothly shifting to a time-shortening game state after a latent probability via winning for allowing game balls to more easily enter a lower start winning device 432 than the latent probability variable game state can be provided to a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 19

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (for example, Patent Document 1). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-1898773

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is, for example, to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably generating a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to a player. It is a thing.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
The first starting part where a predetermined first lottery is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit is made easy to enter the game ball and the game is played. A second starting part where a predetermined second lottery is performed when a ball enters, and
When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the first variation display is performed, and after the first variation display, the first display that can display the first result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery is displayed. Means and
A display control means that executes display control in the first display means, and
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for controlling at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states is provided. As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the player wins in the second lottery.
A normal gaming state in which the winning probability in the first lottery is a predetermined first probability, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the second lottery in the normal gaming state. Advantageous gaming state and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability. A second advantageous gaming state, which is easy for players to enter, is provided.
It is characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the first advantageous gaming state, the transition from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state is made.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably generating a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed (A) is a front view of the game board, and (B) is an enlarged front view of the area XA in the game board. Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Explanatory drawing related to game specifications Explanatory drawing explaining the game state Flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation display time in the variation display of the special symbol in various game states, and (B) is the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in various game states and the variation in the variation display of the normal symbol. The figure explaining the display time, the stop time after the fluctuation display, and an example of the opening / closing pattern of the lower entry regulation mechanism when the normal symbol lottery is won. Front view showing the game board of the second embodiment Explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the game board of 2nd Embodiment Explanatory drawing explaining the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment Flow chart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation display time in the variation display of the special symbol in various game states, and (B) is the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in various game states and the variation in the variation display of the normal symbol. The figure explaining the display time, the stop time after the fluctuation display, and an example of the opening / closing pattern of the lower entry regulation mechanism when the normal symbol lottery is won. A screen diagram showing an example of screen contents at the timing when a decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed when a loss is selected due to a special symbol lottery. Screen transition diagram showing screen transition according to the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery in the low probability time saving game state

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, the structural configuration, the electrical configuration, and various control processes of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shown. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively displaced by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which the top plate portion 111, the bottom plate portion 112, the left side plate portion 113, and the right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). The outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 100, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side (left side plate 113 side) of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction. The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being in a state of being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 can be rotated is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upward by a certain amount, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released. NS. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided in the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C capable of rotating operations are provided in these three opening / closing restricting units 150A to 150C. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portions arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation, whereby the open / close prohibition posture corresponding to the open / close prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close allowance posture, the open / close prohibition state and the open / close allowance state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by combining movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed on the rear block 104 in a state where the rear block 104 is prohibited from opening and closing, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been raised.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulation mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement regulation mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow-down regulation piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be displaced to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is open), the pressure of the flow-down regulation piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the switch is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided with respect to the 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached as. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through the opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. The upper protruding portion 217, the lower protruding portion 218 located on the lower side with respect to the upper protruding portion 217 and projecting forward, and the upper protruding portion 217 and the lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted on the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game field. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball pulling mechanism (not shown), and a ball pulling operation member 232 for operating the ball pulling mechanism. The storage section 231 includes an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage section 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage section 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. An outlet (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball pulling mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later flow into the storage unit 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232.

The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. At the back of the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271-275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271-275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion 211. The left edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and the right edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C are provided as light emitting portions, and the frame emits light corresponding to the respective light emitting portions. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 integrally electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device 291. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. A predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 accordingly, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are rented out. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the firing operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of operating in the up, down, left, and right directions. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that operations such as vibration can be performed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and either before or after the input operation or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects involving the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to eject, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are provided in various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271-) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, the recoil prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 is provided at the exit portion (entrance portion to the game area) of the launch passage 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing each other in parallel, and is provided in the game area from the launch passage 401B. It prevents the game ball once released to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is generally divided by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 on the game board 400. It is provided with a guide member 335 that guides the vehicle to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes according to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and a main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is housed in the translucent board case 391 sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace like the main control board 920, and the game board 400 is housed in the sub-control board 940. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B). FIG. 7A is a front view of the game board 400, and FIG. 7B is an enlarged front view of the area XA in the game board 400. In FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), a part of the wall portion protruding forward from the front surface of the substrate 401 is shown by a thick line for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawings. For reference, in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), a part of the flow path is shown by an arrow, and in FIG. 7 (A), one of the game balls passing through the launch passage 401B. The part is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the game board 400 is arranged substantially in the center of the base 401, a flow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the flow direction and the flow speed of the game ball, and the base 401. The central structure 420, the upper start winning device 431 arranged below the central structure 420, and the starting device related to the second special symbol arranged below the upper starting winning device 431. (Specifically, the lower start winning device 432), the large winning device 433 arranged below the lower starting winning device 432, and the left side with respect to the central structure 420 and the upper side of the lower starting winning device 432. The starting device 436A related to the normal symbol arranged on the (upstream side), the starting device 436B related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side of the lower starting winning device 432 as well as on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, and the lower It includes a general winning device 439A arranged on the left side of the starting winning device 432 and a general winning device 439B arranged on the right side of the lower starting winning device 432.

The upper start winning device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left upper starting winning device 431A and the right upper starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The left upper start winning device 431A is a starting device related to the first special symbol, and the right upper starting winning device 431B is a starting device related to the second special symbol. That is, the upper start winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

The upper start winning device 431 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance 611, and is a distribution unit that mechanically distributes the game ball entering from the entrance 611 to either the left upper starting winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B. (Not shown). The distribution unit is configured so that each time the game ball enters from the entrance 611, the starting prize devices 431A and 431B, which are the distribution destinations of the game ball, are alternately switched. As a result, the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 431 basically alternately enters the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B.

In addition, the upper start winning device 431 has a very low probability of causing a part of the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 to enter the left and right side surfaces of the upper starting winning device 431 without entering any of the starting winning devices 431A and 431B. It has a function of discharging onto the game board 400 from the formed opening (not shown). The probability that the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 is discharged without entering the starting winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, preferably about 1/1000.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper start winning device 431 and the like (see FIG. 10), and a predetermined switch corresponding to each switch is provided. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the area. For example, the left upper start winning switch 441A for detecting the game ball that has entered the left upper start winning device 431A, the right upper starting winning switch 441B for detecting the game ball that has entered the right upper starting winning device 431B, and the lower starting winning device 432 Lower start winning switch 442 that detects the entered game ball, large winning switch 443 that detects the game ball that has entered the big winning device 433, starting switch 446A, 446B that detects the game ball that has entered the starting devices 436A, 436B, general General prize switches 449A, 449B and the like for detecting game balls that have entered the prize devices 439A and 439B are installed on the game board 400.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for fraud prevention (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality generated in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portions of the game balls of the central structure 420 and the starting devices 436A and 436B form entrances, and the game balls that have entered each entrance are discharged to the game area. Each winning device, specifically, the left upper starting winning device 431A, the right upper starting winning device 431B, the lower starting winning device 432, the large winning device 433, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B, the entrance portion of the game ball has a winning opening. The game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, and like the upper starting winning device 431, two or more winning devices (for example, the left upper starting winning device 431A and the right upper starting winning device 431A) may be configured separately. The winning device may be configured by a device in which 431B) is integrated. Further, the starting device such as the upper starting winning device 431 does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter, and the game balls are released again to the game area without being paid out. It may be used as an entrance to the ball.

Each of the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B does not change the entry probability of the game ball into them, and guides the entered game ball to the back side of the base 401. Although the upper start winning device 431 does not change the approach probability to the entrance 611, as described above, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 431 is placed on either the left or right upper starting winning device 431A or 431B. Is also discharged onto the game board 400 (that is, the game area) without entering (that is, without being guided to the back side of the base 401).

Further, the lower start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not have to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. 439A, 439B, may be provided in one or more of the winning devices such as the upper starting winning device 431 including the starting device according to the first special symbol and the starting device related to the second special symbol. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or is represented by a mechanism that operates by the own weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism.

The lower start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a lower entry regulation mechanism 452 and a lower entry regulation mechanism that change the probability of the game ball entering the inside of the lower start winning device 432 by shifting between the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with a lower entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The lower entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the lower entry control solenoid 462, and when the lower entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the lower start winning device 432, but when the lower entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. By arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is increased, the game ball can enter the lower start winning device 432. The lower entry control mechanism 452 is a lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the starting device 436A or the starting device 436B related to the normal symbol is detected by the starting switch 446A or the starting switch 446B (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). In the case of winning in, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time according to the drive by the lower approach regulation solenoid 462.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the grand prize device 433 has an entry control mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the entry regulation mechanism. It is configured as a winning device including an entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the 453.

When the entry control mechanism 453 of the large prize device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the large prize device 433 due to the entry control mechanism 453 closing the entrance (winning opening), but the entry control mechanism When the 453 is in the admissible posture, the entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the grand prize device 433.

The grand prize device does not necessarily have to have a configuration similar to that of the grand prize device 433. For example, a non-specific passage, a specific passage, a non-specific passage switch that detects a game ball that has entered the non-specific passage, and a non-specific passage switch. It is equipped with a specific passage switch that detects the game ball that has entered the specific passage, and by shifting between the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the grand prize device is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. It may be a big prize device including a distribution mechanism for distribution and a switching solenoid for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism. The non-specific passage switch, the specific passage switch, and the switching solenoid included in the grand prize device of the modified example are connected to, for example, the main control board 920.

The pachinko machine 100 may have a configuration in which a large prize device of the modified example is provided in place of the large prize device 433, and a configuration in which a large prize device of the modified example is provided in addition to the large prize device 433. May be good. The game ball that has entered the grand prize device of the modified example is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and is guided in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed backward. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a privilege (for example, described later). It may be configured so that a probabilistic game state) is given.

Further, as the approach permissible posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning opening (or ball entry opening) of each device is formed. Corresponding to the change in posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the lower entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the big prize device 433 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, a lottery based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the upper start winning switch 441 (hereinafter, also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won. If the game is played, or the game ball that has entered the lower start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the lower start winning switch 442, the lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won. If so, the entry control solenoid 463 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the entry control mechanisms 453 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times.

In the grand prize device provided with a non-specific passage and a specific passage inside, the distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball to the non-specific passage or the specific passage is set after a predetermined time from the transition to the approach allowable posture of the approach regulation mechanism 453. It is configured to shift to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465, and further return to the non-guided posture according to the stop of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture.

A device (combined operation device) for setting conditions necessary for the grand prize device 433 to start operation may be arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the grand prize device 433. In the configuration in which the winning combination operating device is provided, after winning the big hit lottery, the large winning device 433 starts operating on condition that the game ball has passed through the winning combination operating device. Therefore, by providing the combination operating device, the player can start the special gaming state at the timing intended by himself / herself when he / she wins the big hit. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that any of the grand prize devices 433 start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device passes through, and instead of or in addition to that, a predetermined time is set. The grand prize device 433 may be configured to start operating as time passes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, the game board 400 includes a display device 471 to 473 that displays a variation display of a symbol and a lottery result, and a display device 476 to 478 that displays the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of converted light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in a light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing judgment of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing judgment. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the left upper start winning device 431A is detected by the left upper starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right upper start winning device 431B or the lower starting winning device 432 is the right upper starting winning switch 441B (Fig. Even if it is detected by the lower start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of hold times by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473 that displays the normal symbol in a variable manner or displays the normal symbol with a stop symbol according to the lottery result in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol even if the game ball that has entered the starting devices 436A and 436B is detected by the start switches 446A and 446B. Is not added.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by a combination of the light emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be fixedly displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not necessarily start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Executes various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time reduction state"). handle.

In the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, if the jackpot type (big hit type) is a predetermined type and the jackpot is won, the variable display time of the second special symbol and the normal symbol is changed after the special game state. A state that is shorter than the non-time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as "time saving state"), and the winning probability of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal gaming state (hereinafter, "" It shifts to the gaming state, which is also called the "special figure high probability state"). In the following, the gaming state that is in the time saving state and the special figure high probability state is also referred to as the “probability changing gaming state”.

Here, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there is only one type of jackpot that can be selected by each special symbol lottery, and if the jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, there is a 100% probability that the special game state Later, it shifts to the probabilistic game state. The type of jackpot (big hit type) may be configured to include a jackpot that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state after a special gaming state and a jackpot that shifts to a gaming state different from the probabilistic gaming state after a special gaming state.

The probabilistic game state shifted after the special game state can be maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and the total number of the unit games is When the predetermined number of times is reached, the time is shortened and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol low probability state"). It shifts to the game state which is (referred to as). In the following, the gaming state which is the time saving state and the special figure low probability state is also referred to as the “time saving gaming state”.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times in the probabilistic game state, it is a time-saving game state. In addition, the game shifts to a gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than that of the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol high probability state"). In the following, the time-saving game state in the high-probability state, which shifts after the probability-change game state, is also referred to as the “time-short-time game state after probability change”.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, a predetermined loss result (result that is not a big hit) is selected in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. If this is the case, the game shifts to a gaming state in which the game is in a time-saving game state and the winning probability by the normal symbol lottery is the same as in the normal game state (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal figure low probability state"). In the following, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition is made when a predetermined loss result (“loss with time reduction” described later) is selected in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The time-saving game state in the probability state is also referred to as the "low-probability time-saving game state".

The time-saving game state (time-saving game state after probability change, low-probability time-saving game state) can be maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). After the total number of the unit games reaches a predetermined number of times, the game returns to the normal game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (for example, 10 times) after the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Although it is configured to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the probability change), it may be configured to return to the normal gaming state after the total number of the unit games reaches a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state, and the first special symbol and the second special The configuration is such that after the total number of unit games related to the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the time-saving game state. Transition based on the winning of the symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery Transition after the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the grand prize device) during the special game state. The game state may be different. For example, if the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, while if the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the probabilistic game state is entered. It may be a configuration that shifts to.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming states and the gaming states does not necessarily have to have the above-mentioned configuration. For example, the special figure high probability state may be continued until the next big hit, or the above-mentioned gaming may be performed depending on other contents. At least one of the states may be configured, a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states may be further included, or the gaming states may be shifted under a condition different from the above-mentioned conditions. good.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variable pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various gaming states are generated. When the game ball that has entered the left upper start winning device 431A, which is the starting winning device related to the first special symbol, is detected by the left upper starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol is started. .. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they are started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even if the player is not in the special game state, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved or the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. Is started after the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in the order of the start prize. The unit game superiority control according to the above may be executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be variable at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol and the type of the jackpot correspond to each other. The type of jackpot is set according to the type of gaming state such as the state (for example, whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state), and the jackpot symbol is set corresponding to the type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a type of jackpot, a jackpot (probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the normal gaming state via the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is provided. The type of jackpot does not necessarily have to be one type as in the present embodiment, and a plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the number of rounds and the type of gaming state such as the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state. It may be a configuration in which a jackpot symbol is set for each type.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various fluctuation pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol is varied. The variable display according to a constant pattern is continued over the display time, and in the case of the decorative pattern, the variable display according to the variable display is continued over the variable display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the entry control mechanism 453 of the big prize device 433 is in the approach allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the grand prize switch 443 during each approach allowable posture in the approach control mechanism 453, or a predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, 29.5) When the second) has elapsed, the entry control mechanism 453 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Then, after the lapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, the entry control mechanism 453 returns to the entry allowance posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The approach restricting mechanism 453 is configured so that only one of them takes an approach-allowed posture during the special game state, and the first entry-allowed posture is taken after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period). One shifts to. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after that, a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, the game ball that has entered the right upper start winning device 431B or the lower start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right upper starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the lower starting winning switch 442. In that case, the start prize of the second special symbol will be awarded. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the game state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436A or the starting device 436B is detected by the starting switch 446A or the starting switch 446B, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, The winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variation display according to a constant pattern for a predetermined variation display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the lower entry restricting mechanism 452 of the lower start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the lower start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probability variation gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the lower start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to enter the permissible posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the lower start winning switch 442, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the lower start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery based on the start prize to the lower start prize device 432 (hereinafter, this lottery may be referred to as "lower special symbol lottery"), first, you must win in the ordinary symbol lottery. In addition, the game ball must enter the lower start winning device 432 in the entry allowed state of the lower start winning device 432 based on the winning. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowed state of the lower start winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since (0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time (for example, approximately 2 seconds) in the short time state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the lower special symbol lottery in the normal game state is First special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery based on the start winning to the upper start winning device 431 (left upper starting winning device 431A, right upper starting winning device 431B) (hereinafter, these lottery are referred to as "upper special symbol lottery" It is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive (sometimes referred to as). On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the lower special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the upper special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the upper special symbol lottery, thereby playing with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the lower special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

The game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central portion of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a launch passage is provided according to the amount of rotation operation (launch intensity of the game ball) of the launch handle 252 by the player. The game ball that has entered (released) into the game area from 401B can be distributed to the left side (the side closer to the entrance of the game area) or the right side (the side away from the entrance of the game area) with respect to the central structure 420. NS. As a result, in the pachinko machine 100, a game method (left-handed game method) in which the game ball is caused to flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420 and a game method in which the game ball is made to flow down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 (left-handed game method). Right-handed game method) can be selectively performed.

As shown in FIG. 7A, each winning device provided on the game board 400 is configured so that the game ball can be won even if the game ball is allowed to flow down from either the left or right side with respect to the central structure 420. The player can play the game by the left-handed game method or the right-handed game method according to his / her needs or his / her preference.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the game board 400 enters the game area from the game ball (that is, the launch passage 401B) launched by the left-handed game method in a part corresponding to the upper left side of the central structure 420. A ball passage portion 641 and a ball passage portion 642 are provided as a ball passage portion through which a game ball (game ball distributed to the left side of the central structure 420) can enter.

The ball passage portion 641 is a ball passage portion provided on the front surface (front surface) side of the substrate 401, and the ball passage portion 641 has a central structure in which the ball passage portion 641 is on the upper left side (tip side) of the inner rail 403. It is formed between a wall portion protruding from the front surface side of the base 401 on the upper left side of the body 420 and a wall portion 651 extending in a direction substantially along the inner rail 403. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the length (width) of the ball passage portion 641 in the width direction (direction intersecting the flow direction) is 1 for the game ball. It is composed of lengths (widths) that can be passed through one by one.

The ball passage portion 641 discharges the flowing game ball on the upstream side of the starting device 436A in the flow area 401C of the game ball located on the left side with respect to the central structure 420. That is, the ball passage portion 641 guides the entered game ball along the peripheral edge of the game area (more specifically, along the inner rail 403) to a position upstream of the starting device 436A in the flow-down area 401C. Functions as a ball passage.

In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball that has entered the game area from the exit (entrance of the game area) of the launch passage 401B does not exceed the wall portion 651 (that is, the game area with respect to the wall portion 651). When entering the area between the wall portion 651 and the inner rail 403), the game ball enters the ball passage portion 641. Therefore, when the game ball launched by the left-handed game technique enters the region between the wall portion 651 and the inner rail 403, the game ball passes through the ball passage portion 641 and is a starting device in the flow-down region 401C. It is guided to a position on the upstream side of 436A.

The wall portion 651 is formed in a shape having an upper surface facing diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the front so as to be separated from the inner rail 403 by a substantially constant distance. The game ball in contact with the upper surface of the wall portion 651 can enter the ball passage portion 642 while reducing the momentum, and since this upper surface is formed over a certain section, the launching force of the game ball varies. However, the game ball can flow down to the ball passage portion 642 at a time interval substantially the same as the firing time interval. The upper surface of the wall portion 651 may be formed in a flat shape or may be formed in a curved curved surface shape.

Here, the wall portion 651 is provided so as to partition the two ball passage portions 641 and 642, and it becomes possible to select which passage the player intended to allow all of the launched game balls to enter. There is. Alternatively, since the wall portion 651 is formed over a certain section, it is possible to facilitate the adjustment operation of how much the game ball is allowed to flow down to the two ball passage portions 641 and 642. .. The inclination angle and length of the upper surface of the wall portion 651 facing diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the front are set so that the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the two ball passage portions 641 and 642 can be different. Therefore, by adjusting the position where the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the wall portion 651, the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the two ball passage portions 641 and 642 can be changed. For example, if the game ball first touches the lower left part near the entrance of the game area, more game balls will pass through the ball passage than when the game ball touches the upper right side. It can be allowed to flow down to unit 641.

The ball passage portion 642 is on the back side or the rear side (that is, the back side of the base 401) far from the player with respect to the ball passage portion 641, and a part thereof is positioned so as to overlap the ball passage portion 641 in the front view. It is a ball passage part provided.

Further, the ball passage portion 642 has a shape in which the angle of the downward inclination of the passage at the same height position in the front view is different from that of the ball passage portion 641. Therefore, in a situation where the game balls flow down to the ball passage portion 641 and the ball passage portion 642 at the same time, the player can easily confirm that the two game balls are flowing down. ..

Further, the ball passage portion 642 is set so that the front-rear width in the direction intersecting the flow direction is different from that of the ball passage portion 641. Specifically, the ball passage portion 641 is set to have a larger front-rear width than the ball passage portion 642, whereby the flow speed of the game balls is made different so that the game balls flow down so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The speed can be changed efficiently.

Further, the width (horizontal width) of the ball passage portion 642 in the front view in the direction intersecting the flow direction is set to be substantially the same as that of the ball passage portion 641. As a result, the width of the passage in the front view can be reduced, and the game area can be efficiently expanded.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the entrance 642A, which is the entrance to the ball passage portion 642, is on the opposite side of the ball passage portion 641 via the wall portion 651 (from the entrance of the game area with respect to the wall portion 651). It is formed through the substrate 401 on the distant side). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, the entrance 642A is a wall projecting from the wall portion 651 and the wall portion 651 on the side away from the entrance of the gaming area and on the front side of the base 401. It is formed through the substrate 401 in a region 653 located between the portion 652 and the portion 652.

An entrance 653A, which is an entrance for a game ball to the area 653, is formed on the upstream side of the area 653, and the game ball that has entered the game area from the exit of the launch passage 401B enters the area 653 by passing through the entrance 653A. You can enter. Except for the position where the inlet 653A is formed, the region 653 is composed of a closed region whose peripheral side is surrounded by the upper side portion (upstream side portion) of the wall portion 651 and the wall portion 652.

Since the entrance 642A of the ball passage portion 642 is formed on the downstream side where all the game balls that have entered the area 653 can reach, when the game ball enters the area 653 from the entrance 653A, the game ball is used. You can enter the entrance 642A. Therefore, when a game ball that has entered the game area from the exit of the launch passage 401B (the entrance of the game area) enters the area 653 via the entrance 653A, the game ball enters the ball passage portion 642 from the entrance 642A and is a ball. It flows down the passage portion 642.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the wall portion 652 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the area 653 faces downstream from the right end side at the entrance 653A (that is, the end side away from the entrance of the game area at the entrance 653A). The curved portion 652A, the descending inclined portion 652B, and the lower side wall portion 652C are included.

The curved portion 652A is a portion curved so as to bulge from the right end side to the right side (direction away from the entrance of the game area) at the entrance 653A. Due to the shape of the curved portion 652A, the region 653 intersects the flow direction of the game ball on the downstream side (lower side) of the inlet 653A and on the upstream side (upper side) of the formation region of the inlet 642A of the ball passage portion 642. The length W2 in the direction is longer than the length W1 in the direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball at the entrance 653A, and is longer than the length W3 in the direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball at the entrance 642A, in the right direction. It is composed of a bulging shape.

The downwardly inclined portion 652B is a portion continuous to the downstream side of the curved portion 652A and is a portion that is downwardly inclined to the left side provided with the inlet 642A. The lower side wall portion 652C is a portion continuous to the downstream side of the descending inclined portion 652B, and is a portion that descends substantially vertically along the lower right peripheral edge of the entrance 642A and a portion that extends substantially horizontally along the lower peripheral edge. It is a part composed of and.

As a result, when a game ball that has entered the game area from the exit of the launch passage 401B enters the area 653 from the entrance 653A, the game ball is once moved to the right side (from the entrance of the game area) by the curved portion 652A of the wall portion 652. After being guided to the side in the direction of leaving), the direction of travel is changed to the left side, and the vehicle is guided to the entrance 642A by the descending inclined portion 652B. Therefore, the traveling direction of the game ball that has entered the game area via the launch passage 401B is gently changed by the curvature of the curved portion 652A, and the game ball can be guided to the entrance 642A while decelerating the speed. The ball can smoothly enter the entrance 642A.

Further, since the lower side wall portion 652C of the wall portion 652 is formed in a staircase shape that is one step lower than the left end of the descending inclined portion 652B, the game ball guided from the descending inclined portion 652B to the lower side wall portion 652C descends again. It is possible to suppress the return to the side of the inclined portion 652B, and at that point as well, the game ball can smoothly enter the entrance 642A.

Like the inlet 642A, the outlet 642B, which is the discharge port from the ball passage portion 642, is located on the opposite side of the ball passage portion 641 via the wall portion 651 and on the upstream side of the starting device 436A in the flow-down region 401C. It is formed through the substrate 401. Therefore, the game ball that enters the ball passage portion 642 from the inlet 642A and flows down the ball passage portion 642 is on the upstream side of the starting device 436A in the flow-down region 401C, similarly to the ball passage portion 641 provided on the front side of the base 401. Is discharged from the outlet 642B.

That is, the ball passage portion 642 functions as a ball passage portion that allows the game ball that has entered from the inlet 642A to flow down on the back surface side of the base 401 and guides the game ball to a position upstream of the starting device 436A in the flow down region 401C. Therefore, when the game ball launched by the left-handed game technique enters the area of the wall portion 651 opposite to the ball passage portion 641, and then enters the ball passage portion 642 from the entrance 642A, the game ball is released. , It is guided to a position on the upstream side of the starting device 436A in the flow-down region 401C via the ball passage portion 641.

The ball passage portion 641 and the ball passage portion 642 may be arranged so that the game ball that has passed through either the ball passage portion 641 or the ball passage portion 642 can easily win a prize in the starting device 436A. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to select the ball passage portion which is presumed to be easy to win the starting device 436A among the ball passage portions 641 and 642.

Further, on the game board 400, the game ball launched by the right-handed game technique (that is, after entering the game area from the launch passage 401B, is distributed to the right side with respect to the central structure 420 on the upper right side of the central structure 420. A ball passage portion 661 and a ball passage portion 662 are provided as a ball passage portion through which the game ball) can enter.

The ball passage portion 661 is a ball passage portion provided on the front side of the base 401, and the ball passage portion 661 is provided with the ball passage portion 641 on the upper right side of the game area and is a part of the peripheral edge of the game area. Is formed between a member constituting the central structure 420 and a wall portion 671 that protrudes from the front surface of the base 401 to the front side on the upper right side of the central structure 420 and extends in a direction substantially along the peripheral edge of the game area. NS. The length of the ball passage portion 661 in the width direction (direction intersecting the flow direction) is configured to be long enough to pass through the game balls one by one.

The ball passage portion 661 discharges the flowing game ball on the upstream side of the starting device 436B in the flow area 401D of the game ball located on the right side with respect to the central structure 420. That is, the ball passage portion 661 functions as a ball passage portion that guides the entered game ball to a position upstream of the starting device 436B in the flow-down region 401D along the peripheral edge of the game region.

In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball that has entered the game area from the exit of the launch passage 401B passes through the upper passage with respect to the central structure 420, exceeds the wall portion 671, and is the game area with respect to the wall portion 671. When entering the area on the peripheral side of the ball, the game ball enters the ball passage portion 661. Therefore, when the game ball launched by the right-handed game technique enters the area on the peripheral side of the game area with respect to the wall portion 671, the game ball passes through the ball passage portion 661 and the starting device 436B in the flow-down area 401D. You will be guided to a position on the upstream side.

The ball passage portion 662 is located on the back side or the rear side (that is, the back side of the base 401) far from the player with respect to the ball passage portion 661, and a part thereof overlaps the ball passage portion 661 in the front view. It is a ball passage part provided. The entrance 662A, which is the entrance to the ball passage portion 662, is formed through the base 401 on the side opposite to the ball passage portion 661 via the wall portion 671. Therefore, after the game ball that has entered the game area from the exit of the launch passage 401B passes through the upper passage with respect to the central structure 420, it does not exceed the wall portion 671 and is on the opposite side of the wall portion 671 from the ball passage portion 661. When entering the area of, the game ball enters the ball passage portion 662 from the entrance 662A and flows down the ball passage portion 662.

Like the inlet 662A, the outlet 662B, which is the discharge port from the ball passage portion 662, is located on the opposite side of the ball passage portion 661 via the wall portion 671 and on the upstream side of the starting device 436B in the flow down region 401D. It is formed through the substrate 401. Therefore, the game ball that enters the ball passage portion 662 from the inlet 662A and flows down the ball passage portion 662 is on the upstream side of the starting device 436B in the flow down region 401D, similarly to the ball passage portion 661 provided on the front side of the base 401. Is discharged from the outlet 662B.

That is, the ball passage portion 662 functions as a ball passage portion that allows the game ball that has entered from the inlet 662A to flow down on the back surface side of the base 401 and guides the game ball to a position upstream of the starting device 436B in the flow down region 401D. Therefore, when the game ball launched by the right-handed game technique enters the area of the wall portion 671 opposite to the ball passage portion 661 and then enters the ball passage portion 662 from the entrance 662A, the game ball is released. , It is guided to a position on the upstream side of the starting device 436B in the flow-down region 401D via the ball passage portion 661.

The ball passage portion 661 and the ball passage portion 662 may be arranged so that the game ball that has passed through one of the ball passage portion 661 or the ball passage portion 662 can easily win a prize in the starting device 436B. This makes it possible for the player to select the ball passage portion of the ball passage portions 661 and 662, which is presumed to be easy to win the starting device 436B.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. And the relay device 950 that relays the signal between the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and the card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100, and the state of the pachinko machine 100. It includes an external terminal board 580, which is a board that outputs signals to a management device (not shown).

The substrate 501 is integrally molded with a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and a passage forming member 521 gradually increasing in height as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion at which the height is lowered and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height that overlaps vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is continuous downward while being curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball breakage detection unit 539 for detecting ball breakage is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The ball-out detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, so that the game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects a ball out condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the external terminal plate 580 is provided at the upper right end portion of the rear block 104 when viewed from the rear. The external terminal plate 580 is provided with an output terminal or the like for outputting a signal during a special game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100. The rear setting switch 905 is a setting valid for enabling the setting operation for setting the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 100 to one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages, 9 stages, etc.). It is a pachinko machine.

A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the rear setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in the present embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial position) to change the ball ejection rate setting. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in the present embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the setting change of the ball ejection rate is enabled, the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. That is, it can be said that changing the setting of the ball ejection rate by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is performed according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode). (Winning probability) and probability variation continuation rate (in this embodiment, the probability of transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state when transitioning to the special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation gaming state) It is possible to select one of nine types of game modes in which the combination with and is different. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball output rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special so that the first hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage are obtained. The ball output rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data according to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type having a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variation continuation rate and the middle type having a medium initial hit probability and a medium probability variation continuation rate. You can select the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly low probability of first hit but a significantly high probability change continuation rate. Further, in each of these types, the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided into three stages of probability states (hereinafter, also referred to as probability setting states) that are smaller than the width of the initial hit probability between each type, that is, Among the three stages, the first-stage probability with the lowest first-hit probability, the second-stage probability with the second lowest first-hit probability, and the third-stage probability with the highest first-hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the upper starting winning device 431 and the lower starting winning device 432 is smaller than that of other types, but the number of winning balls associated with winning the large winning device 433 is larger than that of other types. There are many. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the upper starting winning device 431 and the lower starting winning device 432 is larger than that of other types, but the number of prize balls associated with winning the large winning device 433 is other types. Is less than.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to judge from the number of prize balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and the playability of guessing the setting of which type is made over a long period of time. Can be added.

In addition, the profit margin for the player changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for all types. The profit margins for the players are set to be substantially the same. Therefore, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall side can be easily predicted, and the game field can be easily managed.

It should be noted that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate as described above, and for example, the first hit probability or the probability variation. It may be any of the inrush rates. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The probability that a small hit will be selected, the probability variation inrush rate (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the probability variation game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability variation game state that has shifted after the special game state. May end (for example, the probability that the end of the probabilistic gaming state is selected in the fall lottery performed each time the symbol variation display is executed during the probabilistic gaming state), and each of these game modes It may be a combination of two or more of.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the ball output rate setting change (game mode setting change) is effectively performed by operating the rear setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. .. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is represented by the letters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. Further, in each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by "1", the second-stage probability is represented by "2", and the third-stage probability is represented by "3".

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the top type first-stage probability game mode is "T1", and in the case of the middle-type third-stage probability game mode. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom type second-stage probability game mode is "B2".

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various electric powers from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. By turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown), the pachinko machine can be used. A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are allowed to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the launching handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal sets the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903. The signal relay unit 903 relays the on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated by approximately 90 ° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows a change in the game mode in response to receiving a setting signal in the ON state from the rear setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900 and the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted.

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike this, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , It is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be able to perform information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like so as to be able to perform information output communication only in one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The variable counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting the interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 that sets an initial value in a stack pointer (a part of RAM area) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the determination process S2001 of the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply / firing control board 900 is performed. When it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001: N), the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900. Judgment process S1004, power failure information (partial area of RAM) value determination process S1005, storage information storage state determination process S1007 are performed, and whether the RAM storage information is erased based on these determination results. Whether or not it is determined. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the saved information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the RAM storage information is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 that initially sets various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the retained information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command are received. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game state at the time of the power failure is executed on the sub-control board 940. NS.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is set by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is set. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initialization process S1019).

On the other hand, in the determination process S2001, when the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is determined to be in the ON state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), the RAM 922 The RAM clear process S2002 that erases information in substantially the entire area is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a predetermined plurality of stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM 922. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear processing S2002 erases information in substantially all areas other than the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, the setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

Next, the setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 while the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Is predetermined, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, the value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM 922 as the setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is changed, the setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device. Displayed at 906.

Therefore, a setting changer such as a game hall administrator can use the initialization switch 907 until the game mode to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the selection of the game mode can be completed by causing the upper start winning device 431 (either the left upper starting winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B) to win the game ball. Therefore, in the setting change process S2003, after selecting the game mode by pressing the initialization switch 907, the game ball is inserted into the entrance 611, and the game ball is placed in either the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B. It ends when you win a prize.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), various information other than the information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) is newly initialized in the RAM 922. The setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, it is confirmed that the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, the set command output process S2006 that outputs a set command indicating the completion of the setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to the normal game processing by receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, and recognizes which game mode the main control board 920 operates in. can. After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start processing S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power failure, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. NS. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circular initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also provided except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first fluctuation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

The winning random number counters, jackpot symbol random number counters, stop pattern selection counters, and variable type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have the above-mentioned configurations, and at least a part of the above counters has other configurations. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as needed. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, the fraud detection information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, signals for controlling various actuators such as the ball feed solenoid 332, the launch solenoid 334, the lower approach control solenoid 462, the approach control solenoid 463, and the switching solenoid 465 are output. ..

In the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the upper start winning switch 441A, 441B, the lower starting winning switch 442, the big winning switch 443, the starting switches 446A, 446B, and the general winning switches 449A, 449B are read. , Changes in the detection state of the game ball are detected by various switches.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the lower start winning device 432 and the large winning device 433 are forced to move to the permissible approach posture, and the large winning device having a specific passage inside is vibrated to guide the game ball to the specific passage. Lower start winning device 432 by radio waves, induction of forced malfunction of large winning device 433, guidance of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, left upper starting winning device 431A, right upper starting winning device 431B, lower Detects the occurrence of a situation in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guiding a game ball to the start winning device 432 and the large winning device 433 at an abnormal timing has been performed.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the upper start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the left upper starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right upper starting winning switch 441B, the upper starting winning is won. The counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the lower start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the big prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the big prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), the big prize counter (a predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (RAM). (Predetermined area) is updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, the intermediate block with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is added by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize balls are continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes a control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big prize device 433 Operation control is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the big prize device 433 Operation control is further executed.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the lower start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Playability of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram relating to the specifications of the game applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a lottery probability by a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 13 (A), the winning probability (big hit probability) in the special symbol lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether it is in the special symbol low probability state or the special symbol low probability state. The same jackpot probability is set regardless of whether it is a special symbol. Specifically, in the special symbol low probability state, the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is set to approximately 1/100 (656/65536) regardless of the type of special symbol, and in the special symbol high probability state, the special symbol is set. The winning probability in the lottery is set to approximately 1/20 (3300/65536) regardless of the type of special symbol.

The winning probability in the special symbol lottery is the winning value (for example, "0 to 655" or "0 to 3229") in advance with respect to the range in which the winning random number counter related to the special symbol can take a value (for example, "0 to 65536"). ”, Etc.), and is determined by the ratio of the range to the winning value.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a part of the loss result (that is, the result of not winning the big hit) by the special symbol lottery is selected in the normal game state, the low probability time saving game state (that is, the normal figure low probability) It is set as a loss result (hereinafter, the loss result is also referred to as "loss with time reduction") for transitioning to the time-saving game state of the state.

As shown in FIG. 13 (A), the probability that a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery (probability of time-saving loss) is the same regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Set to probability. Specifically, the probability of losing time in the special symbol lottery is set to approximately 1/218 (300/65536) regardless of the type of special symbol.

The probability of loss with time reduction in the special symbol lottery is a value corresponding to loss with time reduction (for example, "1000 to 10299") with respect to the range in which the winning random number counter related to the special symbol can take a value (for example, "0 to 65536"). Etc.) are predetermined, and are determined by the ratio of the range to the value corresponding to the loss due to the time saving.

FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining an example of the lottery probability by the ordinary symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 13B, the winning probabilities in the ordinary symbol lottery are set to the same jackpot probability regardless of whether the normal symbol lottery is in the low probability state of the normal figure or the low probability state of the normal figure. Specifically, in the normal symbol low probability state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is set to about 1/2 (32700/65536), and in the normal symbol high probability state, the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is approximately 1 minute. It is set to 1 (65500/65536).

The winning probability in the ordinary symbol lottery is the winning value (for example, "0-32699" or "0-65499") in advance with respect to the range in which the winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol can take a value (for example, "0 to 65536"). ”, Etc.), and is determined by the ratio of the range to the winning value.

FIG. 13C is a diagram illustrating an example of the ratio of the jackpot symbols in the special symbol, the probability variation number and the time reduction number set in the game state after the transition for each jackpot symbol. As shown in FIG. 13C, the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol is composed of eight types of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot (big hit type). The eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol are all jackpot symbols in which the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state.

The eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol are one type of jackpot symbol (special diagram 1-4R probability variation jackpot symbol) in which the number of rounds constituting the special game state is four, and two types in which the number of rounds is six. (Special Figure 1_6R Probability Change Big Hit Design 1, Special Figure 1_6R Probability Change Big Hit Design 2) and 5 types of big hit symbols (Special Figure 1_10R Probability Change Big Hit Design 1 to Special Figure 1_10R Probability Change Big Hit Design) 5) and.

The distribution probability of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol is set to 46.0% for the special diagram 1_4R probability variation jackpot symbol, 5.40% for the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, and the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol. 2 is set to 40.6%, special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 1 is set to 0.8%, special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 2 is set to 0.9%, and special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 3 is set to 0.9%. It is set to 1.1%, the special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 4 is set to 0.9%, and the special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 5 is set to 4.3%.

As shown in FIG. 13C, the probability variation number of 10 times is set for all eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol. The number of probable changes is the upper limit of the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) that are continuously executed so that the probabilistic game state can be maintained in the probabilistic game state transitioned after the special game state. This is the number of times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times that the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) can be consecutively non-winned while maintaining the probabilistic game state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, regardless of which of the eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol is selected, in the probabilistic gaming state transitioned after the special gaming state, the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times in a row. If the player is not elected, the game transitions from the probabilistic gaming state to the post-probability time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 13C, of the eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol, three types of jackpot symbols (special figure 1_4R probability variation jackpot symbol, special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol) For 2), 40 time reductions are set regardless of the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed. That is, regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving game state (low-probability time-shortening game state, the probability-changing time-shortening game state), or the probability-changing game state, the special figure 1_4R probability-changing big-hit symbol, special figure 1_6R When the probability variation jackpot symbol 1 or the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 2 is selected, the number of time reductions of 40 times is set.

The number of time reductions is a variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) that are continuously executed while maintaining the time reduction state in the game state that is the time reduction state that transitions after the special game state. This is the maximum number of times, which is the same as the maximum number of times that the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) can be consecutively non-winning while maintaining the time saving state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the special figure 1_4R probability variation jackpot symbol, the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, or the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 2 is selected as the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol. In the gaming state, which is a time-saving state that has transitioned after the special gaming state, when the special symbol lottery is not won 40 times in a row, the game state that is the time-saving state transitions (shifts) to the normal gaming state.

More specifically, when the special figure 1_4R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, or the special diagram 1_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 2 is selected as the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol, the transition occurs after the special gaming state. When the special symbol lottery is not won 10 times in a row in the probabilistic game state, and then the special symbol lottery is not won 30 times in a row in the post-probability time-saving game state transitioned from the probabilistic game state. After the probability change, the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (C), among the eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol, five types of jackpot symbols (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 1 to special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 5) are compared with respect to the five types of jackpot symbols. Regardless of the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed, the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. That is, regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the time-saving game state (low-probability time-shortening game state, the probability-changing time-saving game state), or the probability-changing game state, the special figure 1_10R probability-changing big-hit symbol 1 to special figure When any of the 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbols 5 is selected, the number of time reductions of 10000 is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when any one of the special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 1 to the special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 5 is selected as the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol, the special gaming state is set. In the game state that is the time-saving state that was later transitioned, when the special symbol lottery is not won 10,000 times in a row, the game state that is the time-saving state transitions to the normal gaming state.

More specifically, when any one of the special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 1 to the special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 5 is selected as the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol, in the probability variation gaming state transitioned after the special gaming state. If the special symbol lottery is not won 10 times in a row and then the special symbol lottery is not won 9990 times in a row in the post-probability time-saving game state that has transitioned from the probabilistic game state, the post-probability time-saving game Transition from the state to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 13C, the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol is composed of eight types of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot (big hit type). The eight types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol are all jackpot symbols in which the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state.

As the eight types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol, jackpot symbols corresponding to the eight types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol described above are set. That is, the eight types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol are one type of jackpot symbol (special figure 2_4R probability variation jackpot symbol) in which the number of rounds constituting the special game state is four, and the number of rounds is six. Two types of jackpot symbols (special figure 2_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, special figure 2_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 2) and five types of jackpot symbols (special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 1 to special figure 2_10R probability variation) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds. It is composed of a jackpot symbol 5).

Each jackpot symbol that constitutes eight types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol (special diagram 2_4R probability variation jackpot symbol, special diagram 2_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, special diagram 2_6R probability variation jackpot symbol 2, special diagram 2_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 1, special symbol The distribution probability, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions for the 2_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 2, the special diagram 2_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 3, the special diagram 2_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 4, and the special diagram 2_10R probability variation jackpot symbol 5) are the first special symbols, respectively. The same values as the distribution probability, the probability variation number, and the time reduction number for the corresponding jackpot symbol are set in.

FIG. 13 (D) is a diagram illustrating an example of the ratio of the time-reduced lost symbols in the special symbol and the number of time-reduced times set in the gaming state after the transition with respect to each time-reduced lost symbol. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), the time-saving loss symbol in the first special symbol is composed of two types of time-saving loss symbols (special figure 1_time reduction loss symbol 1, special figure 1_time reduction loss symbol 2). NS. The distribution probability of the time-saving lost symbol in the first special symbol is set to 80% for the special figure 1_time-shortened lost symbol 1 and 20% for the special figure 1_time-shortened lost symbol 2. When the special figure 1_time reduction loss symbol 1 is selected in the normal game state, the number of time reductions of 20 times is set, and when the special figure 1_time reduction loss symbol 2 is selected in the normal game state, 40. The time reduction number of times is set.

On the other hand, the lost symbol with time reduction in the second special symbol is composed of two types of lost symbols with time reduction (special figure 2_missing symbol with time saving 1, special figure 2_ lost symbol with time saving 2). Special figure 2_time reduction loss symbol 1 is set as a time reduction loss symbol 1 corresponding to special figure 1_time reduction loss symbol 1, and special figure 2_time reduction loss symbol 2 corresponds to special figure 1_time reduction loss symbol 2. It is set as a lost pattern with a short time.

That is, the distribution probability of the time-saving lost symbol in the second special symbol is set to 80% for the special figure 2_time-shortened lost symbol 1 and 20% for the special figure 2_time-shortened lost symbol 2. When the special figure 2_time reduction loss symbol 1 is selected in the normal game state, the number of time reductions of 20 times is set, and when the special figure 2_time reduction loss symbol 2 is selected in the normal game state, 40. The time reduction number of times is set.

In addition, in the advantageous gaming state such as the probabilistic game state or the time saving game state, when the time saving lost symbol in the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is selected, the time saving number is not set. ..

FIG. 13 (E) is a diagram illustrating an operating condition of the number-of-times assisting function and an example of a time-saving number of times when the number-of-times assisting function is activated. The number-of-times assisting function provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a condition in which the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is activated in the normal gaming state (number-of-times assisting function operating condition, Hereinafter, when the game is continuously executed until a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as "auxiliary function operation number") is reached (hereinafter, also referred to as "number of times auxiliary condition"), the time-saving gaming state (more specifically, It is a function to transition to a low-probability time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 13 (E), in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, 299 times are set as the number of times the auxiliary function is operated. The number of times the auxiliary function is activated is the maximum number of times that non-winning can be continuously selected in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) while maintaining the normal gaming state in the normal gaming state. Match. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, non-winning (loss result) is continuously selected by a special symbol lottery, and the number of consecutive times reaches 299 times, which is the number of times the auxiliary function is operated. In addition, the number-of-times auxiliary condition is satisfied, and after the end of the 299th variation display (after the confirmation display is displayed), the normal gaming state is transitioned (shifted) to the low-probability time-saving gaming state.

The number of times the auxiliary function is operated may be counted by the number of consecutive non-winnings in the special symbol lottery, excluding the loss with a time reduction (hereinafter, also referred to as "loss without a time reduction").

As shown in FIG. 13 (E), in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of time reductions that is the end condition of the low-probability time-saving game state that has transitioned due to the establishment of the number-of-times auxiliary condition (hereinafter, the number of times of time reduction is referred to as "auxiliary end". 379 times is set as "the number of time reductions").

The number of times of assistance end time is the number of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) that are continuously executed while maintaining the low probability time reduction game state in the low probability time reduction game state transitioned by the establishment of the number assistance condition. This is the maximum number of times that the variable display can be displayed, and matches the maximum number of times that the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery, 2nd special symbol lottery) can be consecutively non-winning while maintaining a low-probability time-saving game state. ing.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery reaches 379 times, which is the number of times of assistance end time reduction, in the low probability time reduction state transitioned by the establishment of the number of times assistance condition. , The end condition of the number-of-times assist function is satisfied, and the low-probability time-saving gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

Next, the progress control of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that can be set in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state. Note that FIG. 15 schematically shows the satisfaction of the main conditions in each gaming state and the control of the device executed when the conditions are satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has two types of normal game states (first normal game state and second normal game state) and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Three types of gaming states (low-probability time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state, and post-probability-changing time-saving gaming state) can be set as states.

Both of the two types of normal game states (first normal game state and second normal game state) are non-time saving states without electric support, and the winning probability (big hit probability) in the special symbol lottery is low. It is a special figure low probability state, and is a gaming state which is a normal figure low probability state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low.

The "electric support" is a state in which the lower start winning device 432 is controlled to facilitate the winning of the lower start winning device 432 by increasing the frequency with which the lower entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture. be. Specifically, the electric support sets, for example, a short (shortened) normal figure fluctuation time, a long time (opening time) for the lower entry control mechanism 452 to enter the allowable entry posture, and wins in the ordinary symbol lottery. It is a state controlled by any one or a combination of a plurality of cases in which the probability is set to a high probability.

The first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state differ in that they trigger a transition to an advantageous gaming state. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, the trigger for the transition to the advantageous gaming state is when the jackpot symbol is selected by the special symbol lottery (that is, when the jackpot is won), and when the jackpot is won, there is a time reduction due to the special symbol lottery. When the symbol is selected (that is, when the time saving loss is selected) and when the number-of-times auxiliary condition is satisfied, in the second normal gaming state, the trigger for the transition to the advantageous gaming state is. , The case where the big hit symbol is selected by the special symbol lottery, and the case where the lost symbol with a short time is selected by the special symbol lottery.

That is, in the first normal gaming state, the establishment of the number-of-times assisting condition is the normal gaming state that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, whereas in the second normal gaming state, the number-of-times assisting condition is satisfied. Is a normal gaming state that does not trigger a transition to an advantageous gaming state.

Although the details will be described later, the second normal game state is a non-winning by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) in the low-probability time-saving game state transitioned by the establishment of the number-of-times auxiliary condition. This is a normal game state in which the transition is made when the number of consecutive times of is reached the short number of times when the auxiliary end time is reached.

The low-probability time-saving game state, which is one of the advantageous gaming states, is a time-saving state with electric support, a special symbol low-probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low, and the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is It is a gaming state that is a low-probability normal figure low-probability state. That is, the low-probability time-saving game state is a game state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low, but there is an electric support.

The probabilistic gaming state, which is one of the advantageous gaming states, is a special symbol high probability state in which the electric support is in a short time state and the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high, and the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is high. It is a gaming state, which is a high-probability state.

The time-saving game state after probability change, which is one of the advantageous game states, is a time-saving state with electric support, a special symbol low probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low, and the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is It is a gaming state that is a high-probability normal figure high-probability state.

As shown in FIG. 15, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on and the game is started, the game starts from the first normal game state. Since the first normal game state is the non-time saving state, the player plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B.

When the first normal gaming state is set by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100, the main control board 920 sets the number-of-times auxiliary flag to ON. The number-of-times assisting flag is a flag that distinguishes whether or not the number-of-times assisting function can be operated, and is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920. More specifically, when the number-of-times assistance flag is set to on, it indicates that the number-of-times assistance function is ready, and when the number-of-times assistance flag is set to off, the number-of-times assistance function is activated. Indicates that it is in an impossible state.

In the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B, it becomes a starting prize related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game is generated, and the first special The fluctuation display of the symbol and the confirmation stop are performed. When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) of the unit game generated by the start winning of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts (shifts) to the special gaming state.

In the special game state, the main control board 920 sets the number-of-times auxiliary flag to ON. Therefore, even when the number-of-times assisting flag is set to off, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the number-of-times assisting flag is turned on and the number-of-times assisting function can be operated.

In the special gaming state, the main control board 920 controls the posture of the entry control mechanism 453 of the big prize device 433 under the conditions according to the type of big hit (big hit type). As a result, in the special gaming state, for example, the operation of the big prize device 433 for about 27 seconds (the entry control mechanism 453 is set to the entry allowable posture) can be performed at the maximum number of rounds according to the type of big hit (big hit type). For example, 4 times, 6 times or 10 times).

After the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state transitions to the probabilistic gaming state. Since the probabilistic game state is the time saving state, the player mainly plays the game aiming at winning the lower start winning device 432. In the probabilistic game state, when the game ball enters the start winning device such as the lower start winning device 432, the starting prize is related to the special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) and the right of the unit game is generated, and the special symbol is generated. Fluctuation display and confirmation stop are performed. When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery) of the unit game generated by the start winning of the special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic game state, the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery is the number of probable changes according to the type of jackpot that triggered the special game state before the transition to the probabilistic game state (in the present embodiment). When the number of times (10 times) is reached for all jackpot types, the end condition of the probabilistic game state is satisfied, and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the probabilistic change.

In the reduced working hours state after the probability change, which is the reduced working hours state, the player mainly plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the lower starting winning device 432. When the game ball enters the start winning device such as the lower start winning device 432 in the short game state after the probability change, the starting prize related to the special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is generated and the right of the unit game is generated. The fluctuation display of the symbol and the confirmation stop are performed. When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery) of the unit game generated by the start winning of the special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state after the probability change, the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state after the probability change and the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery in the probability-changing game state corresponding to the time-saving game state after the probability change ( That is, the total number of time reductions (in the present embodiment) according to the type of jackpot that triggered the special gaming state before transitioning to the probability variation game state corresponding to the probability variation time reduction game state after the probability change. , 40 times or 10000 times), the end condition of the time-saving gaming state after the probability change is satisfied, and the gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state. As described above, since the number-of-times auxiliary flag is set to ON in the special game state, the transition is made according to the end condition established by the digestion of the time-saving number of times in the post-probability time-saving game state generated via the special game state. The normal gaming state is the first normal gaming state.

In the first normal game state, when a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery of the unit game generated by the start winning of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the low-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, in the first normal game state, when the number of times the non-winning is continuously selected by the first special symbol lottery reaches the number of times the auxiliary function is operated (299 times in the present embodiment), the number of times is assisted. Set the flag off. In such a case, since the number-of-times auxiliary condition is satisfied, the gaming state transitions to the low-probability time-saving gaming state.

In the low-probability time-saving game state, the player mainly plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the lower start winning device 432. In the low-probability time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the start winning device such as the lower start winning device 432, the starting prize is related to the special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and the right of the unit game is generated, which is special. The fluctuation display of the symbol and the confirmation stop are performed. When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery) of the unit game generated by the start winning of the special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving game state, the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery depends on the type of the symbol with the time-saving loss when the trigger for the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state is the time-saving loss. The number of time reductions (20 or 40 times in this embodiment), or the number of times of assistance end time reduction (in this embodiment) when the trigger for the transition to the low-probability time reduction game state is the establishment of the number assistance condition. When the number of times is reached (379 times), the end condition of the low-probability time-saving game state is satisfied, so that the game state transitions to the normal game state according to the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag.

Specifically, if the end condition of the low-probability time-saving gaming state is satisfied and the number-of-times assisting flag is set to off, the gaming state transitions to the first normal gaming state, while the number-of-times assisting flag is set. If set to on, the gaming state transitions to the second normal gaming state.

That is, when the number of times auxiliary condition is satisfied in the first normal game state (that is, when the number of consecutive non-winning selections by the special symbol lottery reaches the number of times the auxiliary function is operated), then Since the number-of-times auxiliary flag is not turned on unless a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery), the normal gaming state transitioning from the low-probability time-saving gaming state becomes the second normal gaming state. After the number of times subsidy condition is satisfied in the first normal game state, the transition from the low-probability time-saving game state to the first normal game state becomes possible by winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured so that the number-of-times assist condition is not satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state. In contrast to this configuration, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is in the low-probability time-saving gaming state because the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery before the number-of-times assistance condition is satisfied in the first normal gaming state. In the case of transitioning to, the number of times the auxiliary function is operated (that is, the number of times the auxiliary function is operated (that is, 20 times or 40 times) is set as the number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state according to the type of the symbol with the time reduction. , Number of times Increase the number of times of variable display of special symbols to satisfy the auxiliary condition).

As a result, the number-of-times auxiliary condition that was not satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state can be satisfied later in the first normal game state after the low-probability time-saving game state ends. For example, if the time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery before the number of times auxiliary condition is satisfied in the first normal game state, the time reduction number of times in the low probability time saving game state is selected according to the type of the time saving loss symbol. When the number of times set as is 20 times, it is added to the number of times specified as the number of times the auxiliary function is operated (for example, 299 times). As a result, for example, in the first normal game state, when the time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery, and the time saving loss is the 280th non-winning in a row, the low probability time saving game state. In the first normal game state after the end of, the counting of the number of consecutive non-winning times by the special symbol lottery for satisfying the number-of-times auxiliary condition will be restarted from the 281st time.

Since the second normal game state is the non-time saving state, the player plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B. In the second normal game state, when the game ball enters the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B, it becomes a starting prize related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game is generated, and the first special The fluctuation display of the symbol and the confirmation stop are performed. When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) of the unit game generated by the start winning of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the second normal game state, when a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery of the unit game generated by the start winning of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the low-probability time-saving game state.

FIG. 16A is a diagram for explaining an example of the fluctuation display time (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”) in the fluctuation display of the special symbol in various gaming states. As shown in FIG. 16A, a plurality of types of special symbol fluctuation times in each game state are provided according to the number of times a unit game is held for a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 16A is the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display (so-called loss fluctuation) of the special symbol that does not include the reach display. Here, the fluctuation display time of the loss fluctuation may be set to two or more different times instead of one type. In this case, the execution probability and the fluctuation display as the expected value of the fluctuation display time of the loss fluctuation are set. The length of the special figure fluctuation time as the sum obtained by multiplying the time may be set to be the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 16 (A).

When the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol is 0 (zero) (that is, when the number of holds when the change display is started becomes 0), the special figure change time is the normal game state and the low probability time reduction. It is set to "A (for example, 12 seconds)" in the game state, and is set to "A'(for example, 11 seconds)" which is slightly shorter than A in the probabilistic game state and the post-probability change time-shortening game state.

When the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 1 to 3 (that is, when the number of holdings when the variation display is started is 1 to 3), the special symbol fluctuation time is set to "A" in the normal game state. Is set to "B (for example, 1/6 of A)" which is shorter than A in the low-probability time-saving game state, and is shorter than A and B in the probabilistic game state and the post-probability time-shortening game state. It is set to a longer "C (eg, half of A)".

When the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 4 to 7 (that is, when the number of holdings when the variation display is started is 4 to 7), the special symbol fluctuation time is set to "C" in the normal game state. , And set to "B" in the low-probability time-saving game state, and set to "C" in the probabilistic game state and the post-probability time-saving game state.

FIG. 16B shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in various gaming states, the fluctuation display time in the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal symbol fluctuation time”), the stop time after the fluctuation display, and It is a figure explaining an example of the opening / closing pattern of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 of the lower start winning apparatus 432 when the ordinary symbol lottery is won.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state is set to about half, and the normal symbol lottery in the probabilistic game state and the post-probability time-saving game state is set. The winning probability of is set to about 1/1.

There are three types of normal map fluctuation time in the normal game state: 11 seconds, 15 seconds, and 19 seconds. The expected value (average value) of the normal map fluctuation time in the normal gaming state is, for example, about 15 seconds. The normal fluctuation time in the low-probability time-shortening gaming state is set to 0.62 seconds, and the normal fluctuation time in the probability-changing gaming state and the post-probability-changing time-shortening gaming state is set to 0.6 seconds. The stop time of the normal symbol after the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds in any of the normal game state, the low probability time saving game state, the probability variation game state, and the probability variation time reduction game state.

In the normal game state, the opening time (permissible entry time) of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 when winning the normal symbol lottery is set to 0.076 seconds, and the number of times of opening (the number of times the entry is allowed to enter) is once. Is set to. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened only once in a pattern of opening for 0.076 seconds (shifting to the approach allowable posture).

In the low-probability time-saving game state, the opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is set to 2 seconds, the number of openings is set to 2 times, and the closing time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is set when the normal symbol lottery is won. It is set to 0.252 seconds. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the low-probability time-saving game state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 opens for 2 seconds, closes for 0.252 seconds (returns to the entry prohibition posture), and opens again for 2 seconds. Will be released at.

In the probabilistic game state and the short-time game state after the probabilistic change, the opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 when the normal symbol lottery is won is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the probabilistic game state and the reduced working hours game state after the probabilistic change, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened only once in a pattern of opening for 2 seconds.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the low-probability time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to about half, the game balls are generally twice in the starting devices 436A and 436B. Since the normal symbol lottery is won each time the player enters, the lower entry control mechanism 452 is composed of two times (0.62 seconds, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time + 0.5 seconds, which is the normal symbol stop time). At intervals, it is opened twice for 2 seconds each with a closure period of 0.252 seconds. That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is calculated to be open for 4 seconds in approximately 6 seconds (0.62 × 2 + 0.5 × 2 + 2 × 2 + 0.252).

On the other hand, in the probabilistic game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to about 1/1, the normal symbol lottery is generally won every time the game ball enters the starting devices 436A and 436B. The entry control mechanism 452 is opened once in 2 seconds at an interval composed of one time (0.62 seconds, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time + 0.5 seconds, which is the stop time of the normal symbol). That is, in the probabilistic gaming state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is calculated to be opened for 2 seconds in approximately 3 seconds (0.6 + 0.5 + 2).

Therefore, in both the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic variation gaming state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened for 4 seconds (twice) in about 6 seconds (that is, opened for 2 seconds (once) in about 3 seconds). Therefore, these two game states are game states in which the winning probabilities of the normal symbol lottery are different, but the winning rates for the lower start winning device 432 are substantially the same.

The ending time is a waiting period after the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern according to the game state by winning the normal symbol lottery, and then the next normal symbol variation display is allowed to be executed. be. As shown in FIG. 16B, the ending time in the normal gaming state is set to 15 seconds. That is, in the normal gaming state, 15 seconds after the lower entry control mechanism 452 is finally closed, the next variation display of the normal symbol is started.

On the other hand, the ending time is set to 0 (zero) seconds in the low-probability time-shortening game state, the probability-changing game state, and the post-probability-changing time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, the probability-changing game state, and the probability-changing time-saving game state, the next variation display of the normal symbol is started immediately after the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is finally closed.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to about half, approximately every time the game ball enters the starting devices 436A and 436B twice. Since the normal symbol lottery is won, it is about 15 seconds, which is one cycle when the normal symbol lottery is not won (about 15 seconds, which is the expected value of the normal symbol fluctuation time + 0.5, which is the stop time of the normal symbol. Seconds) and about 30 seconds, which is one cycle when the normal symbol lottery is won (about 15 seconds, which is the expected value of the normal symbol fluctuation time + 0.5 seconds, which is the stop time of the normal symbol + lower entry regulation It is calculated that the mechanism 452 is opened once in approximately 45 seconds, which is the sum of 0.076 seconds, which is the opening time, and 15 seconds, which is the ending time.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is in a low-probability time-saving game state when a time-saving loss is selected in a special symbol lottery in a normal game state, or when the number-of-times assistance condition is satisfied. This is a pachinko machine configured to shift to and activate the fluctuation time shortening function (hereinafter referred to as "time saving function") (time saving state occurs).

In the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the timing at which the time saving function is activated (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is fixedly displayed with the lost symbol corresponding to the lost due to the shortened time, or the lost symbol that satisfies the number-of-times auxiliary condition (this implementation). In the form, if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the timing (the timing at which the 299th consecutive lost symbol) is confirmed or the timing at which the special gaming state ends), the normal symbol is displayed during the variable display. The lottery is performed with a low probability (that is, about half), and the opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 when the lottery is won is the opening time (that is, 2 seconds) in a time-saving state.

Therefore, in the normal game state where the expected value of the normal symbol fluctuation time is approximately 15 seconds and the ending time of 15 seconds is provided, when the time saving function is activated during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the control corresponding to the time saving state is executed after the end, the maximum waiting time until the player benefits from the time saving state related to the opening of the lower entry control mechanism 452 is the maximum value of the normal map fluctuation time19. It is seconds (about 15 seconds if it is an expected value).

On the other hand, when the opening control of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is being performed at the timing when the time saving function is activated, the opening control continues the control of the normal gaming state before the time saving state, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol performed next is performed. From to the control corresponding to the time saving state. That is, when the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the open control at the timing when the time saving function is activated, the lower entry regulation is released after the time saving state is dealt with from the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to be performed next. The opening time of the mechanism 452 is also the opening time in the shortened time state.

The period during which the lower entry control mechanism 452 is controlled to open is the period from the start of opening of the entry control mechanism 452 until the execution of the next variation display of the normal symbol is permitted. That is, the period during which the lower entry control mechanism 452 is opened (opening control period) in the normal gaming state with an ending time of 15 seconds is the last period for opening and closing the entry control mechanism 452 and winning the normal symbol lottery. The period consisting of the waiting period (that is, the period constituting the ending time) from the closing to allowing the execution of the fluctuation display of the next ordinary symbol is shown. Since the opening of the approach restricting mechanism 452 in the normal gaming state (that is, the non-time saving state) is as short as 0.076 seconds, the opening of the lower approach regulating mechanism 452 in the normal gaming state provided with an ending time of 15 seconds is provided. The control period is approximately 15 seconds, which is approximately equal to the length of the ending time.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when the time saving function is activated during the opening control of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452, the control corresponding to the time saving state is performed from the next fluctuation display of the normal symbol performed after the opening control is completed. Since it is executed, the execution of the next variation display of the normal symbol is allowed at the maximum after about 15 seconds corresponding to the period of the opening control of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452.

Since the normal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state is about 0.6 seconds (0.6 seconds or 0.62 seconds), when the lottery probability of the normal symbol lottery is the normal figure low probability state (about 1/2). In addition, the time required for two fluctuations of a normal symbol is about 1 second. Therefore, when the time saving function is activated during the opening control of the lower entry control mechanism 452 and the next variation display of the normal symbol is continuously performed after the opening control is completed, the player lowers. The maximum waiting time until the benefit of the time saving state related to the opening of the entry control mechanism 452 is approximately 15 seconds corresponding to the period of the opening control of the entry control mechanism 452.

That is, in the normal game state in which the expected value of the normal symbol fluctuation time is approximately 15 seconds and the ending time of 15 seconds is provided, the timing at which the time saving function is activated is the case where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress. However, even when the lower entry control mechanism 452 is being controlled to open, the maximum waiting time for the player to benefit from the time saving related to the opening of the lower entry control mechanism 452 is approximately 15 seconds. Therefore, the maximum waiting time from when the time saving function is activated in the normal gaming state until the player benefits from the time saving state related to the opening of the lower entry control mechanism 452 is about 15 seconds.

In addition, even when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not performed at the timing when the time saving function is activated and the opening control of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is not performed, the control corresponding to the time saving state is performed from the fluctuation display of the normal symbol performed next. Will be executed. That is, both the normal map fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to be performed next and the opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 opened after the fluctuation display are set to the time corresponding to the time reduction state.

On the other hand, in the normal game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to about half, the lower start winning device 432 is omitted without setting the ending time (that is, setting the ending time to 0 seconds). If it is set to be opened once in 45 seconds, the expected value (average value) of the normal figure fluctuation time is about 22.5 seconds, which is half of about 45 seconds. Therefore, when the winning rate of the lower start winning device 432 in the normal gaming state is substantially the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment without providing the ending time, the time saving function is activated during the variable display of the normal symbol. In this case, the maximum waiting time until the player benefits from the time saving state related to the opening of the lower entry control mechanism 452 is approximately 22.5 seconds, which is the expected value of the normal map fluctuation time.

On the other hand, in the configuration in which the ending time is not provided, the opening control period of the lower approach regulating mechanism 452 in the normal gaming state is 0.076 seconds, which is the opening time of the approach regulating mechanism 452 in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the winning rate of the lower start winning device 432 in the normal gaming state is substantially the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment without providing an ending time, the time is shortened during the opening control of the lower entry regulating mechanism 452. When the function is activated and the next variation display of the normal symbol is continuously performed after the opening control is completed, the opening time of the entry control mechanism 452 is 0.076 seconds, which is the normal symbol. When the lottery probability of the lottery is in the low probability state of the normal figure (about 1/2), after about 1 second required for the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the player shortens the time for opening the lower entry regulation mechanism 452. You can benefit from the condition.

That is, when the winning rate of the lower start winning device 432 in the normal gaming state is substantially the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment without providing the ending time, the time saving function is activated in the normal gaming state, and then the time saving function is activated. The maximum waiting time for the player to benefit from the time saving state related to the opening of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is the maximum waiting time when the timing when the time saving function is activated is normally displaying the fluctuation of the symbol. It is 22.5 seconds.

Therefore, in the configuration in which the winning rate to the lower start winning device 432 is substantially the same, the time saving function is activated in the former game state in the case where the ending time is provided and the case where the ending time is not provided. Therefore, the maximum waiting time for the player to benefit from the time saving state related to the opening of the lower entry control mechanism 452 can be shortened.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the winning rate to the lower start winning device 432 in the normal gaming state can be set low by providing the ending time (that is, the lower starting winning device 432 with respect to the normal drawing fluctuation time). It is possible to set the ratio of the opening time to be small), and the longest waiting time until the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened can be shortened.

The ending time (or the length of the opening control period) in the normal game state is not necessarily the sum of the normal map fluctuation time (15 seconds in this embodiment) or the normal map fluctuation time and the stop time in the normal game state. It does not have to be the same or substantially the same time length as (15.5 seconds in the present embodiment), for example, from the opening time (for example, 0.076 seconds) of the lower entry control mechanism 452 in the normal gaming state. It may be another long time length (eg, 10 seconds). In addition, the ending time (or the length of the opening control period) in the normal game state is approximately 50% to 150% of the normal map fluctuation time (or the sum of the normal map fluctuation time and the stop time) in the normal game state. The time length is preferably 7.5 seconds or 22.5 seconds, and the time length is from approximately 70% to 130% of the fluctuation time of the normal map (for example, 10.5 seconds or 19. 5 seconds) is even more preferable, and a time length of approximately 90% to 110% (for example, 13.5 seconds or 16.5 seconds) of the fluctuation time of the normal map is more preferable.

Further, as a configuration for shortening the maximum waiting time until receiving the benefit of the time saving state, the ending time in the normal gaming state is not limited to be provided, and instead of or in addition to this, the lower entry regulation mechanism An opening period before the opening of the 452 may be provided, or an interval period may be provided when the lower entry control mechanism 452 is set to be opened a plurality of times. That is, the sum of the opening period, the interval period, the ending period, and the period during which the lower entry control mechanism 452 is opened so that the game ball can easily enter the lower start winning device 432 is defined as the opening control period by the main control board 920. , The length of the open control period when the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal game state and the length of the fluctuation display period corresponding to the sum of the normal figure fluctuation time and the stop time in the normal game state are approximately the same or close to each other. It is preferable to set each time length so as to be the length.

Here, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the ball passage portion 642 is provided at least a part on the back side far from the player with respect to the ball passage portion 641 and overlaps with the ball passage portion 641 on the back side. Since the section is provided, the game area by the ball passage portion 641, 642 is compared with the case where the ball passage portion 642 is provided side by side with the ball passage portion 641 in the game area (the area on the front side in the game board). It is possible to suppress the occupied area in the surface direction, and to that extent, it is possible to suitably secure an area for arranging various structures such as the central structure 420, the decorative symbol display device 479, and the movable accessory for directing. Become.

Similarly, the ball passage portion 662 is also provided with at least a part on the back side far from the player with respect to the ball passage portion 661, and a section overlapping the ball passage portion 661 on the back side is provided. Compared with the case where the ball passage portion 662 is provided side by side with the ball passage portion 661 in the game area, the area occupied by the ball passage portions 661 and 662 in the surface direction of the game area can be suppressed by that amount, and the central structure It is possible to suitably secure an area for arranging various structures such as 420, a decorative pattern display device 479, and a movable accessory for production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the ball passage portion 641 is configured as a ball passage substantially along the peripheral edge of the game area (that is, the arrangement position of the inner rail 403). Therefore, since the two-path ball passages (ball passage portions 641, 642) are provided on the peripheral side of the game area, the game is also suppressed at this point while suppressing the game ball from flowing down in a monotonous flow path. It is possible to suitably secure an area for arranging various structures such as the central structure 420, the decorative symbol display device 479, and the movable accessory for the effect on the central side of the area.

Similarly, the ball passage portion 661 is configured as a ball passage substantially along the peripheral edge of the game area, whereby a two-path ball passage (ball passage portions 661, 662) is provided on the peripheral side of the game area. Therefore, while suppressing the game ball from flowing down in a monotonous flow path, various structures such as a central structure 420, a decorative symbol display device 479, and a movable accessory for directing are arranged on the center side of the game area. It is possible to suitably secure an area for this.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the ball passage portion 641,661 flows down substantially along the peripheral edge of the game area (for example, the arrangement position of the inner rail 403). However, the ball passage portions 641 and 661 do not necessarily have to be passages substantially along the peripheral edge of the game area. It may be configured so as to overlap with a region closer to one sphere in front view.

Even in the configuration of the modified example, the ball passages (ball passage portions 641, 642, ball passage portions 661, 662) of two paths are provided on the peripheral side of the game area, so that the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is used. Similarly, while suppressing the game ball from flowing down in a monotonous flow path, various structures such as a central structure 420, a decorative symbol display device 479, and a movable accessory for directing are arranged on the center side of the game area. It is possible to preferably secure an area for this.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a low-probability time-saving gaming state is provided as an advantageous gaming state. In the low-probability time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to the normal symbol low probability state (the same state as the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state), and the normal symbol lottery is won. The total opening time of the lower entry control mechanism 452 is longer than the total opening time in the probability variation gaming state (2 seconds, which is the opening time in one opening) (the total opening time in two openings). Since it is set to a certain 4 seconds), even in the low probability state of the normal figure, the winning rate to the lower start winning device 432 is the same as the probabilistic game state of the high probability state of the normal figure in a new advantageous gaming state. be. Therefore, since the types of game states that can be generated have increased, it is possible to suitably diversify the games that switch between the normal game state and the advantageous game state according to the conditions that are established as the game progresses.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the sub-control board 940 controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the lower start winning device 432 (that is, the opening control of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452). When the control is executed, the ending time is set to be longer than the opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 as a waiting period from the end of the control until the execution of the next variation display of the normal symbol is allowed. When the winning rates for the lower start winning device 432 are substantially the same value, the normal figure fluctuation time can be shortened by the amount provided with the ending time (waiting period). When the fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 (lower start winning device 432) makes it easier for the game ball to enter with the opening time in the time saving state (that is, 2 seconds longer than the non-time saving state). The longest waiting time until becomes can be shortened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the winning rate for the lower start winning device 432 can be set low, and the longest time until the player receives the privilege of the advantageous gaming state (more specifically, the time saving state). The waiting time can be shortened.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous gaming states include a low-probability time-saving game state (a game state in which there is an electric support and a special symbol low-probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low). Probability change game state (a special figure high probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high, and a normal figure high probability state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is high), and the time reduction after the probability change. Game state (a game in which there is an electric support, a special symbol low probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low, and a normal symbol high probability state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is high. Although three types of states) have been illustrated, advantageous gaming states different from these three types of advantageous gaming states can also be used.

For example, a game in which there is no electric support, a non-time saving state, a special symbol high probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high, and a normal symbol low probability state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low. One of the advantageous gaming states that can be used is a state, that is, a so-called "latent probability change" state via a big hit in a special symbol lottery, in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is a low probability state. Can be exemplified as.

In addition, there is a short time state with electric support, a special symbol high probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high, and a normal symbol low probability state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low. That is, a gaming state in which the time is shortened after the end of the latent probability change via the jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be exemplified as one of the available advantageous gaming states.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there is a time saving state in which there is an electric support after the probability change game state via the big hit in the special symbol lottery, and the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low. It is a state, and the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is high. The game state, which is the normal symbol high probability state, is configured to occur as a time-saving game state after the probability change. The time of occurrence of the gaming state, which is the special figure low probability state in which the winning probability in It does not have to be "after the probabilistic game state via".

For example, as a type of jackpot (big hit symbol) that can be selected by a special symbol lottery, a time-saving jackpot is provided in addition to the jackpot that shifts to the probability-changing gaming state after the end of the special gaming state (that is, the probability-changing jackpot). When the time-saving jackpot is selected, after the end of the special game state, the game state is similar to the time-saving game state after the probability change (that is, the time-saving state with electric support, and the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low. It may be configured to shift to the game state in which the figure is in the low probability state and the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is high in the normal figure high probability state).

In addition, when a game ball enters the non-specific passage in a large prize device having a non-specific passage and a specific passage inside, the electric support is in a short time state, and the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is low. The configuration may be such that the player shifts to the game state, which is the low-probability state of the figure and the high-probability state of the normal figure, which has a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag is turned on each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100, but the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag is that the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. It may be held even when it is turned off, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100, the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag may be the state when the power is turned off.

According to the configuration of such a modification, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off (that is, the power switch 909 is switched to the off state) while the number of times assisting flag is set to the off by the establishment of the number of times assisting condition. If the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on without pressing the initialization switch 907, the number-of-times auxiliary flag remains off, and the pachinko machine 100 is turned on the number of times when the power is turned on. The auxiliary function becomes inoperable.

In the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration of this modification, when the number-of-times auxiliary flag is off when the power is turned on, a predetermined signal capable of identifying the state is managed via the external terminal plate 580 (see FIG. 8). It is configured to output to a device (not shown).

Here, a notification function at the time of turning on the power when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the number-of-times auxiliary flag is set to off will be described. For example, whether or not the number-of-times auxiliary flag is on or not by changing the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 depending on whether the number-of-times auxiliary flag is on or off when the power is turned on ( That is, it may be configured to notify (whether or not the number assist function can be operated).

Specifically, for example, when the number-of-times auxiliary flag is on when the power is turned on, the frame light emitting devices 271-275 are continuously lit in a predetermined color (for example, blue), and the number-of-times auxiliary flag is set when the power is turned on. When it is in the off state (that is, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the number-of-times auxiliary flag is in the off state), the frame light emitting devices 271-275 have a color different from the predetermined color (for example,). , Red) may be configured to blink.

That is, in the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration of this modification, if the power is turned on after the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the number-of-times auxiliary flag set to off, the frame light emitting device 271 The light emitting mode (output mode) of to 275 is set to the first light emitting mode (for example, blinking in red), and the power supply is turned off after the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the number-of-times auxiliary flag set to ON. When is turned on, the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 is set to the second light emitting mode (for example, continuous lighting in blue).

As a result, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100, employees in the hall and the like can distinguish at a glance whether the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag in each pachinko machine 100 is on or off. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, when the power is turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 100 in a predetermined situation such as before the opening of a plurality of halls in a predetermined situation such as before the opening of the hall, the employees of the hall or the like in each pachinko machine 100 It is possible to distinguish the stored contents of the RAM of the main control board 920 (that is, which of the on-state and off-state count auxiliary flags is stored in the RAM) according to the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate operations such as initialization as needed.

The power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on after the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the number of times auxiliary flag set to off, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on with the number of times auxiliary flag set to on. The light emitting patterns (output patterns) of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 may be different from each other when the power is turned on after being turned off. For example, in the former case, the frame light emitting devices 271-275 emit light in a light emitting pattern in which red and blue are alternately lit, and in the latter case, the frame light emitting devices 271-275 are alternately lit in yellow and green. It may be configured to emit light in a light emitting pattern. Further, the light emitting mode may be different between the state in which the number-of-times auxiliary flag is set to off and the state in which the frequency assist flag is set to on, and as one of the modes, a mode in which light is not emitted may be taken.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration of this modification, when the frame light emitting devices 271-275 emit light in a light emitting mode indicating that the number auxiliary flag is off when the power is turned on, the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation device (for example, the pressing operation device 261) provided on the side, the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 is changed while keeping the state of the number auxiliary flag. May be good.

For example, in a configuration in which the frame light emitting devices 271-275 blink in red when the number-of-times auxiliary flag is off when the power is turned on, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed for a short time (in a state where the frame light emitting devices 271-275 blink in red). For example, when the operation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within 1 second), the red blinking disappears (for example, the frame light emitting devices 271-275 are turned off, the blinking changes to lighting, etc.). ) It may be configured. However, in such a case, the state of the number-of-times assisting flag does not change, and the number-of-times assisting function remains inoperable (that is, the second normal game state).

On the other hand, if the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the number of times auxiliary flag is set to off and the number of times auxiliary flag is turned off when the power is turned on, the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. When the provided initialization switch 907 is pressed, the light emitting mode indicating that the number-of-times auxiliary flag in the frame light emitting devices 271-275 is in the off state is changed (for example, red blinking in the frame light emitting devices 271-275). It may be configured (such as disappearing, changing to the same light emission mode as when the number auxiliary flag is on when the power is turned on, etc.). In such a case, since the number-of-times assisting flag is initialized to the on state, the number-of-times assisting function returns to the first normal gaming state and becomes operable.

That is, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration of this modification, if the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and then turned on while the number-of-times auxiliary flag is set to off, the employees in the hall will be affected. By operating the initialization switch 907, it is possible to return to the first normal gaming state in which the number-of-times assist function can be operated while changing the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275.

Therefore, when the power is turned on after the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the number-of-times auxiliary flag set to off, a person other than the player, such as a hall employee, operates the initialization switch 907. Then, when a lottery result (that is, a loss) different from the winning in the special symbol lottery is continuously selected, a normal gaming state capable of generating a low-probability time-saving gaming state occurs, and the frame light emitting device 271 The light emitting mode of ~ 275 can be changed to a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode. This makes it easy to prevent the game from starting from the normal game state due to a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, the player operates the pressing operation device 261 without changing the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag (that is, while maintaining the second normal game state), and the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275. Can be changed. Therefore, among the plurality of pachinko machines 100 that have adopted the second light emitting mode, some pachinko machines 100 have the second light emitting mode, and the rest operate the pressing operation device 261 or the initialization switch 907. It is possible to take measures according to the policy of the amusement park (hall), such as setting a predetermined light emission mode. As a result, the player can use the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 as an index when selecting the pachinko machine 100 to play the game, and can amplify the interest in selecting the pachinko machine 100. ..

In addition, the player can operate the pressing operation device 261 by selecting the pachinko machine 100 having a light emitting mode that he / she is interested in, and then selecting whether or not to change the pachinko machine 100 to another mode according to his / her own will. As a result, the player can be given a degree of freedom to change the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 with respect to the state of the game, and the degree of freedom of operation for the pachinko machine 100 can be increased.

As a configuration for notifying whether or not the number-of-times auxiliary flag is on when the power is turned on, a case where the light emitting mode of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 differs depending on the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag when the power is turned on has been illustrated. The decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display a display according to the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag when the power is turned on.

For example, when the number-of-times assisting flag is on when the power is turned on, a predetermined character string that can be inferred that the number-of-times assisting function can be activated, such as "the number-of-times assisting function can be operated", is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, if the number-of-times assisting flag is off when the power is turned on, a character string that can be inferred that the number-of-times assisting function cannot be operated, such as "number-of-times assisting function cannot be operated", is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. May be good. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays a character string that can be inferred that the number-of-times assist function cannot be operated when the number-of-times assist flag is off when the power is turned on, and the number-of-times auxiliary flag is on when the power is turned on. In some cases, the character string may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the number of times auxiliary flag is set to off when a predetermined operation device (for example, the pressing operation device 261) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 is operated. It may be configured to turn off the power. As a result, the number-of-times assist flag is always turned on when the power is turned on, and the pachinko machine 100 can be in a state in which the number-of-times assist function can be operated. Further, the state of the number-of-times auxiliary flag may be cleared without being held even when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state, a decorative symbol consisting of a specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. When it is confirmed and displayed at 479 and a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery in the low-probability gaming state, a combination that does not correspond to the time-saving loss (that is, a combination different from the specific combination corresponding to the time-saving loss). Is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are such that the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the low-probability gaming state. Regardless of the time saving state, a specific symbol corresponding to the time saving hassle is displayed by the light emitting patterns of a plurality of light emitting units.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is a game board 700 different from the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiment (hereinafter, the embodiment is also referred to as “first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and some configurations will be described. Different parts will be given different numbers with the same name, different parts will be described, and the same parts will be omitted.

FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 700 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, FIG. 18 (A) is a front view of the central structure 710 constituting the game board 700, and FIG. 18 (B) is a front view. It is a front view of the base 720 which constitutes the game board 700. In addition, in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 (B) shows the shape of the openings 711 to 713 of the central structure 710 with a chain line for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 17, the game board 700 is configured by attaching various members including the central structure 710 to the base 720. The central structure 710 is a member formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a central opening 711 having a large opening in the central portion and a ball passage portion 741,742,761,762 with respect to the central opening 711. It is configured to include outer openings 712 and 713 provided on both the left and right sides of the left and right flow areas 701 and 702, respectively.

The ball passage portion 741,742,761,762 is configured in the same manner as the ball passage portion 641,642,661,662 in the first embodiment described above. For example, the ball passage portion 741 discharges the flowing game ball upstream from the starting device 436A in the flow area 701 of the game ball located on the left side with respect to the central structure 710. The ball passage portion 742 is on the back side or the rear side (that is, the back side of the base 720) far from the player with respect to the ball passage portion 741, and a part thereof is positioned so as to overlap the ball passage portion 741 in the front view. It is a ball passage part provided.

The ball passage portion 742 receives the game ball from the entrance 742A, which is the entrance, and causes the game ball to flow down to the exit 742B, which is the discharge port. By allowing the game ball to enter the region 753A beyond the wall portion 751 into the ball passage portion 742, the game ball can flow down. The player can select which of the two passages 741 and 742 the ball passages 741 and 742 are intended to have all of the launched game balls enter, and both passages. It is configured so that the game ball can flow down at the rate intended by the player.

The ball passage portion 761,762 is a ball passage portion provided symmetrically with respect to the ball passage portions 741,742. The ball passage portion 762 is a ball passage portion that is launched to the right side of the central structure 710 and allows a game ball that has fallen in front of the wall portion 771 to enter, and is a game received from the entrance 762A via the area 753B. Let the ball flow down to exit 762B.

The central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713 are provided so as to be located in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 arranged on the back side of the central structure 710. The player can visually recognize the image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 through the openings 711 to 713.

The central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713 are configured to be capable of displaying various images under the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10). In this case, it is preferable to display images that are related to each other in either or both of the central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713. For example, the central opening 711 and / or both of the outer openings 712 and 713 display a variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the symbol that stops first is the outer opening 712. , 713, and the last stopped symbol is displayed in the central opening 711. Further, for example, an effect image such as a character is displayed in the central opening 711 as a variable display effect of the decorative symbol, and a history or execution of the character or the like displayed in the variable display is displayed in the outer openings 712 and 713. The expected degree of winning a big hit is displayed by the number and size of numbers and symbols (for example, stars) in the variable display. Further, a common background image (for example, sky, night view, etc.) including the central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713 is displayed so as to be continuous. By applying such a display method, a sense of unity is created between the central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713, and surrounds the central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713. It can be a pachinko machine equipped with a central structure 710 as a large center frame, and can be differentiated from other models.

The left and right flow-down regions 701 and 702 are provided between the central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713 in a front view. Further, in the upper portion of the flow-down regions 701 and 702, two ball passage portions (each of the ball passage portions 741, 742 and the ball passage portions 761, 762) partially overlap each other as in the first embodiment described above. It is provided in this way. Then, as in the first embodiment described above, the player is among the two ball passage portions (each of the ball passage portions 741, 742 and the ball passage portions 761, 762) provided so as to partially overlap each other. It is possible to select which ball passage portion the game ball passes through, and thereby it is possible to realize a game property in which the player selects an advantageous ball passage portion estimated by the player.

The left and right flow areas 701 and 702 have a symmetrical shape, and are provided so that the two ball passage portions (each of the ball passage portions 741, 742 and the ball passage portions 761 and 762) partially overlap each other. Be done. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that the two ball passages partially overlap each other on the left and right sides, and one or three or more ball passages should be provided for one or both of the flow areas 701 and 702. Also, it is not always necessary to configure the ball passages to have overlapping portions, and in front view, either or both of the left and right flow areas 701 and 702 do not have overlapping portions. It may be configured as follows.

The left and right flow areas 701 and 702 are composed of two ball passages (each of the ball passages 741, 742 and the ball passages 761, 762) on the upper side, and the lower parts are the starting devices 436A and 436B and general prizes. It is composed of a part of the base 720 provided with the devices 439A and 439B, the nail 411, the wind turbine 412 and the like. It should be noted that either or both of the left and right flow-down regions 701 and 702 may be configured to be composed of only the ball passage portion so that a part of the base 720 is not arranged, or one of the base 720 by eliminating the ball passage portion. It may be composed of only parts.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the central structure 710 exposes three display openings 711 to 713 that make it easier to see the information displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479, and the front side of the base 720. The openings 714A and 714B for the flow change member are provided so that the nail 411 and the like can be arranged. Further, the central structure 710 has a portion constituting the ball passage portion 741,742,761,762, switch mounting portions 715A and 715B for attaching switches as starting devices 436A and 436B, and general winning devices 439A and 439B. It is composed of a combination of entrance constituents 716A and 716B forming an entrance portion of the game ball and a stage portion 717 that rolls the game ball left and right.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the substrate 720 is provided with a mounting opening 721 for mounting the central structure 710. The mounting opening 721 has a shape in which, of the left and right flow regions 701 and 702 (see FIG. 17), a portion corresponding to the lower portion has a protruding region 722 and 723 protruding inward of the mounting opening 721. ing. The protruding portions of the protruding regions 722 and 723 project greatly upward so that the left and right outer regions have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the protruding regions 722 and 723 upward is longer than the length corresponding to the gap formed between the protruding tip and the opening edge portion on the upper side, which is more than twice as long in the present embodiment. Is set to. As a result, the display content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, including the central opening 711 and the outer openings 712 and 713, can be easily recognized by the player as a display having a sense of unity, and the game can be played. It is possible to add a function as a pachinko machine with variations without making the flow of the ball monotonous.

Further, among the openings 721 of the base 720, the lower portions of the end side openings 724 and 725 that are continuous downward on both left and right end sides are the game balls of the general winning devices 439A and 439B (see FIG. 17). The opening 726,727 for the winning device that guides the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the player to the rear side is integrated. The winning device openings 726 and 727 are formed in a shape protruding from the outside to the center side, and are integrated with the display openings 724 and 725. As a result, the number of holes required for router processing can be reduced, and the manufacturing time of the substrate 720 can be shortened.

Here, the configuration, operation, and effect of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described.

The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment forms a launch passage 401B through which the game ball launched by the launching device 330 that launches the game ball passes, and a game area on the front side through which the game ball passing through the launch passage 401B flows down. It is provided with a base 720 to be used. Further, a central opening 711 capable of displaying information such as a decorative pattern is provided between the flow area 701 on the left side and the flow area 702 on the right side when viewed from the player side. Further, when viewed from the player side, a left outer opening 712 capable of displaying information different from the information displayed in the central opening 711 is provided between the flow area 701 on the left side and the launch passage 401B. .. Further, on the right side away from the launch passage 401B from the flow area 702 on the right side when viewed from the player side, information different from the information displayed in the center side opening 711 and the left outer opening 712 can be displayed on the right outer side. An opening 713 is provided. Then, all the information displayed in the three openings 711 to 713 is displayed by the display contents of the display screen of one decorative symbol display device 479 under the control of the sub control board 940. Therefore, it is easy to relate the display contents of the central opening 711 to the display contents of the outer openings 712 and 713 on both the left and right sides with the flow-down regions 701 and 702 interposed therebetween, and there is a sense of unity. The displayed content can be displayed in a part of the game area, and the game area can be suitably used.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. The pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment is configured to include three types of advantageous gaming states (low-probability time-saving gaming state, probability-changing gaming state, and post-probability-changing time-saving gaming state). In 100, in addition to these three types of advantageous gaming states, the configuration includes an advantageous gaming state different from the three types of advantageous gaming states.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the third embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, or the above-described first embodiment and the second embodiment may be added. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a gaming state that can be set in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has two types of normal gaming states (first normal gaming state and second normal gaming state) and five types of advantageous gaming states (low-probability time-saving gaming). The state, the probability-changing game state, the time-saving game state via hit, the latent probability-changing game state, and the time-saving game state after hit-via latency) can be set.

Among the above-mentioned advantageous gaming states that can be set in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state via hit is the gaming state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state after the probability change in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. Therefore, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has five types of gaming states (first normal gaming state, second normal gaming state, and low-probability time-saving gaming state) that can be set in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. , Probability variation game state, time saving game state via hit), and two types of advantageous gaming states (latent probability variation game state, time saving game state after hit via latency) can be set.

The latent probability change game state is a non-time saving state without electric support, a special figure high probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high, and a normal symbol low probability in which the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low. It is an advantageous gaming state which is a state.

The time-saving game state after hit-through latency is a time-saving state with electric support, a special symbol high probability state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high, and the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low. Figure This is an advantageous gaming state, which is a low-probability state. In other words, in the time-saving game state after hitting via latency, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is low, as in the low-probability time-saving game state, but while the game state is in the time-saving state with electric support, the low-probability time-saving Unlike the gaming state, it is a gaming state in which the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is high.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment. FIG. 20 schematically shows the satisfaction of the main conditions in each gaming state and the control of the device executed when the conditions are satisfied. Hereinafter, in the description of the flowchart of FIG. 20, the description relating to the same configuration as the flowchart (see FIG. 15) showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment is omitted, and the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment omits the description. The peculiar part will be mainly explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, in the special gaming state, the main control board 920 sets the posture of the entry control mechanism 453 of the big prize device 433 as a big hit type (big hit type). ), And control according to the conditions.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a type of jackpot, in addition to the same probabilistic jackpot as the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment (that is, a jackpot that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the special gaming state). , A big hit (time-saving big hit) that shifts to the time-saving game state via hit after the end of the special game state, and a big hit (latent-probability big hit) that shifts to the latent probability change game state after the end of the special game state are provided.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (that is, the jackpot symbol), the jackpot symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as “probability variation jackpot symbol”) and the time-saving jackpot are supported. A jackpot symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a "short-time jackpot symbol") and a jackpot symbol corresponding to the latent jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as a "latent jackpot symbol") are provided.

The probabilistic jackpot symbol may be composed of one type of probabilistic jackpot symbol, or may be composed of a plurality of types of probabilistic jackpot symbols due to differences in the number of rounds constituting the special gaming state. Similarly, the time-saving jackpot symbol may be composed of one type of time-saving jackpot symbol, or may be composed of a plurality of types of time-saving jackpot symbols due to differences in the number of rounds constituting the special gaming state. Further, the latent jackpot symbol may be composed of one type of latent jackpot symbol, or may be composed of a plurality of types of latent jackpot symbols due to differences in the number of rounds constituting the special gaming state. The number of types of probabilistic jackpot symbols, the number of types of time-saving jackpot symbols, and the number of types of latent jackpot symbols do not have to be the same, and the number of independent types is set for each jackpot symbol. May be good.

After the end of the special gaming state, as shown in FIG. 20, the game transitions to the gaming state according to the type of jackpot that triggered the special gaming state. Specifically, when the type of jackpot that triggered the special gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot (that is, the stop symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol), the gaming state is changed to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Transition.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot that triggered the special gaming state is the time-saving jackpot (that is, the stop symbol is the time-saving jackpot symbol), the gaming state is changed to the time-saving gaming state via hit after the end of the special gaming state. Transition. In addition, when the type of jackpot that triggered the special gaming state is the latent probability jackpot (that is, the stop symbol is the latent jackpot symbol), the gaming state is changed to the latent probability changing gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Transitions.

In the probabilistic game state, the game state transitions to the special game state when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery). On the other hand, in the probabilistic game state, the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery becomes the number of probable changes (for example, 10 times) according to the probable change jackpot that triggered the special game state before transitioning to the probabilistic game state. When it reaches, the game state transitions to the time-saving game state via hit (corresponding to the time-saving game state after the probability change in the first embodiment).

In the time-saving game state via hit, the game state transitions to the special game state when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery). On the other hand, in the time-saving game state via hit, when the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of time-saving, the end condition of the time-saving game state via hit is satisfied, and the normal game state (more in detail). Transitions to the first normal gaming state).

The number of time reductions, which is the end condition of the time-saving game state via hit, is before the transition to the probability-changing gaming state when the time-saving gaming state via hit is a gaming state that has transitioned after the probability-changing gaming state due to the probability-changing jackpot. It is the number of time reductions (for example, 40 times) according to the probability variation jackpot that triggered the special gaming state, and is the number of time reductions including the probability variation number that is the end condition of the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state via hit is a gaming state that transitions after the special gaming state due to the time-saving jackpot, the number of time reductions that is the end condition of the time-saving game state via hit is the number of time reductions corresponding to the time-saving jackpot ( For example, 100 times).

Since the latent probability change game state is a non-time saving state, the player plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the left upper start winning device 431A or the right upper starting winning device 431B. In the latent probability change game state, the game state transitions to the special game state when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).

On the other hand, in the latent probability change game state, when the non-winning without time reduction (non-winning excluding the loss with time reduction) reaches a predetermined number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) among the non-winning by the special symbol lottery, the latent probability change The end condition of the gaming state is satisfied, and the gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state (more specifically, the first normal gaming state). In addition, in the latent probability change game state, when a loss with a time reduction is selected in the special symbol lottery, the game state transitions to the time reduction game state after the hit via latent probability.

Since the reduced working hours state after the hit via latency is the reduced working hours state, the player mainly plays the game aiming at winning the lower start winning device 432. In the short-time game state after the probability of hitting, the game state transitions to the special game state when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery).

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) in the time-saving game state after hit-via latency, the end condition of the time-saving game state after hit-via latency Is established, and the gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state (more specifically, the first normal gaming state). It should be noted that the number of time reductions that is the end condition of the time reduction game state after the hit via latency may be 1 time reduction number that is uniformly set as the end condition of the time reduction game state after the hit via latency, and there may be a plurality of types of time reductions. When there is a loss, the time reduction may be set for each type of loss.

FIG. 21 (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of the special figure variation time in the variation display of the special symbol in various gaming states. As shown in FIG. 21 (A), in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state, and the hit-via time-saving gaming state (the post-probability time-saving gaming in the first embodiment). The special figure fluctuation time in the gaming state corresponding to the state) is set to be the same as the special figure fluctuation time in each corresponding gaming state in the first embodiment.

The special figure fluctuation time in the latent probability change gaming state is set to be the same as the special figure fluctuation time in the normal gaming state. That is, the special figure fluctuation time is set to "A" for the case where the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol is 0 (zero) and the number of times of holding is 1 to 3, and the number of times of holding is set to "A". When it is 4 to 7, the special figure fluctuation time is set to "C".

The special figure fluctuation time in the time-shortening game state after the hit via latency is the special figure when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 0 (zero) and the number of holdings is 0 in the low-probability time-saving game state. When the time is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time (that is, A) (for example, 10 seconds) and the number of holdings is 1 to 3, the number of holdings in the low probability time saving game state is 1 to 3. When the time is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time (that is, B) (for example, 1 second) and the number of holdings is 4 to 7, the number of holdings in the low probability time-shortening gaming state is 4 to 7. It is set to a time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the special figure fluctuation time (that is, B) of.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (A), the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held is 0, 1 to 3, and 4 to 7, in any case. An example is shown in which the special figure fluctuation time in the time-saving game state after the hit-through latency is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation time in the low-probability time-shortening game state, but at least a part of the number of holdings from 0 to 7 is set. Regarding the number of holdings, the special figure fluctuation time in the time-shortening game state after the hit via latency may be set to be the same as the special figure fluctuation time in the low-probability time-saving game state.

FIG. 21 (B) shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in various gaming states, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the stop time after the fluctuation display, and the lower entry regulation of the lower start winning device 432 when the normal symbol lottery is won. It is a figure explaining an example of the opening / closing pattern of the mechanism 452. As shown in FIG. 21 (B), in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state, and the hit-via time-saving gaming state (the post-probability time-saving gaming in the first embodiment). Each value in each corresponding gaming state) is set to be the same as each value in each corresponding gaming state in the first embodiment.

The winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the latent probability change game state is set to about half. Further, the normal map fluctuation time in the latent probability variation game state is set to 15 seconds, which is the same as the expected value of the normal map fluctuation time in the normal game state. It should be noted that the normal map fluctuation time in the latent probability variation game state may be configured to be provided with a plurality of types of normal map fluctuation times (for example, 11 seconds, 15 seconds, and 19 seconds) as in the case of the normal game state. .. The stop time of the normal symbol after the normal symbol fluctuation time in the latent probability change game state is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the stop time in the normal game state.

In the latent probability change game state, the opening time (permissible entry time) of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 when winning the normal symbol lottery is set to 0.076 seconds, and the number of times of opening (the number of times of the allowable entry posture) is 1. Set to times. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the latent probability change game state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened only once for 0.076 seconds (to the approach allowable posture) as in the case where the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal game state. It is released in the (transition) pattern.

The winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the short-time game state after the hit via latent probability is set to about half. In addition, the normal fluctuation time in the time-shortening game state after the hit-through latency and the stop time of the normal symbol after the normal-figure fluctuation time are both 0.62 seconds and 0.5 seconds, which are the same as in the low-probability time-shortening game state. Each is set.

In the short game state after the hit via latency, the opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is set to 2 seconds, the number of openings is set to 3 times, and the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is closed when the normal symbol lottery is won. The time is set to 0.252 seconds. That is, the opening / closing pattern of the lower entry restricting mechanism 452 in the time-saving gaming state after the hit via latency is the opening / closing pattern of the lower entry regulating mechanism 452 in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, except that the number of openings changes from 2 to 3. Is set to be the same as.

Therefore, if the normal symbol lottery is won in the short game state after the hit via latency, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 opens for 2 seconds, closes for 0.252 seconds (returns to the entry prohibited posture), and then the second time. After opening for 2 seconds as opening, it is closed for 0.252 seconds, and after opening for 2 seconds as the third opening, it is opened in a pattern of closing for 0.252 seconds.

In the short game state after the hit via latency, where the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to about half, the normal symbol lottery is generally won every time the game ball enters the starting devices 436A and 436B twice. Therefore, the lower entry control mechanism 452 has a closing period of 0.25 seconds at an interval composed of two times (0.62 seconds, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time + 0.5 seconds, which is the stop time of the normal symbol). It is released 3 times for 2 seconds each.

That is, in the short-time game state after the hit via latency, the lower approach regulation mechanism 452 is calculated to be released for 6 seconds in approximately 8.5 seconds (0.62 × 2 + 0.5 × 2 + 2 + 0.252 + 2 + 0.252 + 2). It becomes. In other words, in the short-time game state after the hit via latency, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is calculated to be opened approximately once every 2.8 seconds (2 seconds).

On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, as described above, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is generally opened for 4 seconds in about 6 seconds, that is, opened once (2 seconds) in about 3 seconds. It becomes a calculation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, both the time-saving game state after the hit-through latency and the low-probability time-saving game state have electric support, but the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is the low-probability state. Although it is in a state, the winning rate to the lower start winning device 432 is higher than that in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, it is easier for the game ball to enter the lower-start winning device 432 than in the low-probability time-saving gaming state). Can be.

Also in the probabilistic gaming state, as described above, the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is calculated to be opened approximately once every 3 seconds (2 seconds). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is lower than that in the probabilistic game state, but the winning rate to the lower start winning device 432 is higher. It is possible to set the gaming state to be higher than the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the gaming ball is easier to enter into the lower start winning device 432 than the probabilistic gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 21 (B), the ending time in the latent probability changing gaming state, which is the non-time saving state, is set to 15 seconds, which is the same as the ending time in the normal gaming state, which is also the non-time saving state. On the other hand, the ending time in the time-saving game state after the hit-via latent probability, which is the time-saving state, is the ending in various advantageous game states (low-probability time-saving game state, probability variation game state, and hit-via time-saving game state), which are also in the time-saving state. Similar to the time, the time length is set to be shorter than the ending time in the normal gaming state (0 (zero) seconds in the present embodiment). That is, in the short-time game state after the hit via latency, the next normal symbol variation display is started immediately after the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is finally closed.

The ending time (or the length of the opening control period) in the latent probability variation game state is not necessarily the normal map fluctuation time (15 seconds in this embodiment) or the normal map variation time and the stop time in the latent probability variation game state. It is not necessary to have the same or substantially the same time length as the sum of (15.5 seconds in the present embodiment), for example, the opening time of the lower entry control mechanism 452 (for example, 0.076) in the latent probability change gaming state. It may be another time length (eg, 10 seconds) longer than (seconds). Further, the ending time (or the length of the opening control period) in the latent probability variation game state is approximately 50% to 150 with respect to the normal map fluctuation time (or the sum of the normal map variation time and the stop time) in the latent probability variation game state. The time length up to% (for example, 7.5 seconds or 22.5 seconds) is preferable, and the time length from about 70% to 130% of the fluctuation time of the normal map (for example, 10.5 seconds or more). It is still more preferably 19.5 seconds), and more preferably a time length (for example, 13.5 seconds or 16.5 seconds) of about 90% to 110% of the fluctuation time of the normal map.

Further, as a configuration for shortening the maximum waiting time until receiving the benefit of the time saving state, the ending time is set in the latent probability changing game state which is the non-time saving state as in the case of the normal gaming state described in the first embodiment. It is not limited to the provision, and instead of or in addition to this, an opening period before the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened may be provided, and there are a plurality of states in which the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 is opened. An interval period may be provided when the frequency is set to occur. That is, the sum of the opening period, the interval period, the ending period, and the period during which the lower entry control mechanism 452 is opened so that the game ball can easily enter the lower start winning device 432 is defined as the opening control period by the main control board 920. , The length of the open control period when the normal symbol lottery in the latent probability variable game state is won, and the length of the variable display period corresponding to the sum of the normal figure fluctuation time and the stop time in the latent probability variable game state are substantially the same or It is preferable to set each time length so that the time lengths are close to each other.

FIG. 22 is a screen view showing an example of screen contents at the timing when a decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed when a time-saving loss is selected by a special symbol lottery. More specifically, FIG. 22 (A) is a screen view showing an example in the case where a loss with a time reduction is selected by a special symbol lottery in the normal game state, and FIG. 22 (B) is a screen view showing an example in the low probability time reduction game state. It is a screen diagram which shows an example in the case where the loss with a time saving is selected by the special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a time-saving state such as a low-probability gaming state, if a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving is reduced. A combination that is not displayed when a loss other than the presence loss (that is, a loss without time reduction) is selected, and a decorative symbol consisting of a specific combination is configured to be confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

The specific combination that is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery is, for example, the combination shown in FIG. 22 (A), that is, displayed in the symbol row 680L on the left side. The decorative symbol with the number "1" drawn, the decorative symbol with the number "1" displayed in the central symbol row 680M, and the number "4" displayed in the symbol row 680R on the right side. It is a combination with a decorative pattern on which "" is drawn.

When a time-saving loss is selected by a special symbol lottery in the normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 479 starts variable display of the decorative symbol, and after a predetermined special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the time-saving loss is dealt with. The decorative symbols of the combination to be used (for example, the decorative symbols of the combination shown in FIG. 22A) are confirmed and displayed, and after the confirmed display, the gaming state shifts to the low-probability time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the time saving no loss is selected by the special symbol lottery in the normal game state, the combination corresponding to the time saving no loss after the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the variation of the decorative symbol over a predetermined special symbol fluctuation time. (For example, a decorative symbol having a combination different from the combination shown in FIG. 22 (A)) is confirmed and displayed. In such a case, the game state remains the normal game state even after the final display of the decorative symbol, except when the number-of-times assistance condition is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the time saving loss is selected by the special symbol lottery in the low probability time saving game state, the time saving number of times is not added (that is, the remaining number of times of the time saving number is not reset to the maximum value). Is configured. That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, even when the decorative symbol of the combination corresponding to the loss with time reduction is confirmed and displayed, the same as the case where the decorative symbol of the combination corresponding to the loss without time reduction is confirmed and displayed. Only one time saving is digested.

In such a pachinko machine 100, when a time-saving loss is selected by a special symbol lottery in a low-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after the variable display, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (B). By superimposing a semi-transparent image on the front side of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R, the contents of each decorative symbol constituting a specific combination corresponding to a time saving loss can be visually recognized. It is configured to be difficult. By superimposing an opaque image on the front side of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R, the content of the final display of each decorative symbol constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss. May be configured to make the image invisible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the time saving loss is selected by the special symbol lottery in the low probability time saving game state, each decorative symbol (number) constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss is formed. "1" or "4") is a mode that is more difficult to see than when a loss is selected by a special symbol lottery in a normal game state (for example, the transparency of coloring is displayed in a color close to the background color). Is high, etc.). Therefore, also in this respect, it is difficult to visually recognize the content of the definite display of each decorative symbol constituting the specific combination corresponding to the time saving and the loss.

Therefore, even if the time-saving loss is selected by the special symbol lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state, the player can use the decorative symbol of the combination corresponding to the time-saving loss in the low-probability time-saving game state in the configuration in which the number of time reductions is not added. Can be suppressed from being recognized as a definite display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes that the time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery from expecting the time saving number to be added even though the time saving number is not added.

The probability of making the finalized display of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R difficult to see or invisible is not necessarily 100%, and is determined by a predetermined lottery. The content of the definite display of the decorative symbol may be difficult to see or invisible with a probability (for example, a probability of about 1/2).

As a configuration for making the content of the definite display of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R difficult to see or invisible, a semi-transparent or opaque image is necessarily placed on the front side of each decorative symbol. It is not necessary to superimpose the images, and at least the translucent or opaque images may be superposed on the front side of the area (for example, the part where the numbers are drawn) in which the contents can be specified in each decorative pattern, and all the decorations. A semi-transparent or opaque image having a size that overlaps the design when viewed from the front side may be superimposed.

Further, the image overlapping on the front side of each decorative pattern does not have to be a substantially rectangular image as shown in FIG. 22 (B), and is an image having a shape other than a rectangle such as an image in the shape of a character. There may be. Further, it may be configured to display only the outer shape of the decorative symbol and not display at least a part of the finalized display content of the decorative symbol (for example, a portion on which a number that can identify the content is drawn).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is composed of a liquid crystal display, and the final display of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R depending on the display method on the liquid crystal display. Although the contents of the above are difficult to see or cannot be seen, a light guide plate having translucency is provided on the front side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479, and at least a part of the light guide plate is made to emit light. The content of the definite display of each decorative symbol displayed in the symbol rows 680L, 680M, and 680R may be difficult to see or may not be visible.

Further, instead of the decorative symbol display device 479 provided with a liquid crystal screen, in a pachinko machine that performs variable display and definite display of decorative symbols by a plurality of rows of cylindrical reels arranged in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction, the reels in each row are used. On the front side, a light guide plate having a shape that is curved along the arc of each reel in a cross-sectional view is provided, and at least a part of the light guide plate is made to emit light, so that the content of the definite display of the decorative pattern by each reel is displayed. May be configured to be difficult to see or invisible.

Here, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as an advantageous gaming state, a time-saving gaming state after hitting via latency is provided. In the time-saving game state after the hit via latency, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set to the normal symbol low probability state (the same state as the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state) as in the low-probability time-saving game state. At the same time, the total opening time of the lower entry control mechanism 452 when winning the normal symbol lottery is longer than the total opening time of the same opening time in the normal gaming state (0.076 seconds, which is the opening time in one opening). (6 seconds, which is the total opening time for 3 openings).

In addition, in the time-saving game state after hit-through latency, the total opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 when winning the normal symbol lottery is the total opening time in the probability-changing game state, as in the low-probability time-saving game state. It is said to be longer than (2 seconds, which is the opening time for one opening).

In other words, the time-saving game state after hit-via latency is a new advantageous game state similar to the low-probability time-saving game state, that is, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is as low as the normal game state (more specifically, the probability variation game). Although it is lower than the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the state), it is an advantageous gaming state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter (win) the lower start winning device 432 compared to the normal gaming state, and even in the normal drawing low probability state. , In a new advantageous gaming state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the lower start winning device 432 (that is, the winning rate to the lower starting winning device 432) is the same as the probabilistic gaming state in which the probability is high. be. Therefore, as the types of game states that can occur, the number of time-saving game states after hitting latent probability has increased, and as a result, a game that switches between a normal game state and an advantageous game state according to the conditions that are established as the game progresses is preferable. It becomes possible to diversify.

In particular, in the time-saving game state after the hit via latency, the total opening time of the lower entry regulation mechanism 452 when winning the normal symbol lottery is the total opening time in the low-probability time-saving game state (opening in two times of opening). Since the time length is longer than the time (2 seconds, which is the time) (6 seconds, which is the total opening time for 3 times of opening), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is kept low as in the normal game state. As an advantageous gaming state, it is easier for the game ball to enter (win) the lower start winning device 432 and to win the special symbol lottery (that is, it is easier to transition to the special gaming state) as compared with the low-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states including the gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the time-saving game state after the hit-through latent probability is a gaming state that shifts to the case where the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the latent probability change game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game property that smoothly shifts to the reduced working hours game state after the hit via hit, which makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower start winning device 432 from the latent probability change game state, without going through the special game state. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the winning probability and the special of the normal symbol lottery are determined by the establishment of the same conditions (that is, the selection of the loss with a short time by the special symbol lottery) in the normal game state and the latent probability change game state. The probability of winning the symbol lottery is the same, and the game shifts to an advantageous gaming state in which the gaming ball easily enters the lower start winning device 432. Therefore, when a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states are provided, it is easy for the player to understand the transition conditions to the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to easily standardize the control of the gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a predetermined transition condition (that is, an end condition of the time-saving game state after hit-via latency due to the number of time reductions) is satisfied after the transition to the time-saving game state after hit-via latency. In this case, since the game state shifts from the time-saving gaming state after the hit-via latency to the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to dispel the monotonous feeling caused by the long-term continuation of the hit-via latency-shortening gaming state, and the latent probability variation game. It is possible to provide a game property in which the game state smoothly shifts between the state and the time-saving game state after the hit via latency.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the ending time of the normal game state described in the first embodiment, the latent probability change game state controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the lower start winning device 432 ( That is, when the lower entry control mechanism 452 (open control) is executed by the sub-control board 940, the lower entry regulation is set as a waiting period from the end of the control to the permission of the execution of the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol. The ending time is set for a period longer than the opening time of the mechanism 452. Therefore, by shortening the special figure fluctuation time by the amount of the waiting time, the winning rate for the lower starting winning device 432 (the ease of entering the game ball into the lower starting winning device 432) can be set low. , When a short game state occurs after the hit via latency during the variable display of the special symbol, the lower start winning device 432 is opened for a time length that is advantageous (longer opening time) than the latent probability change game state. The longest waiting time until this happens can be shortened.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the normal game state. A definite display with the same content as in the case (confirmed display by combining specific decorative symbols) is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the control by sharing most of the control until the loss with time reduction is selected in the special symbol lottery and the confirmation display by the decorative symbol is displayed in the normal game state and the low probability time reduction game state. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a loss with a time reduction is selected by a special symbol lottery during the normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), a low probability time reduction is performed. When the game shifts to the game state and the counting of the number of time reductions is started from the initial value (zero), when the time reduction loss is selected by the special symbol lottery during the low probability time reduction game state, The game state remains the low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving number of times is not added (that is, the counting of the time-saving number of times is continued without being returned to the initial value).

In contrast to this configuration, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the low-probability time-saving game state, a combination of specific decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed (that is, that is). The display mode of (combination of decorative symbols corresponding to loss due to time saving) is displayed differently from that in the normal gaming state. As a result, during the normal game state, the player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the time saving loss, and the time saving loss is selected in the normal game state, so that the predetermined number of time reductions is set. It is possible for the player to recognize the transition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the low-probability time-saving game state, the display mode of the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the time-saving loss is displayed differently from that in the normal game state. .. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss due to the time reduction during the low probability time reduction state, it is possible to easily recognize that the situation is different from that during the normal gaming state.

That is, when a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the normal game state, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state, while the low-probability time-saving game. Even if a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the situation is different from that during the normal game state.

As a result, if a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery during the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving number of counts will not be started again from the initial value, but the time-saving loss will be dealt with. The player recognizes the definite display by the combination of the decorative symbols to be used, and thereby it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the counting of the number of time reductions is started again from the initial value. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the time-saving loss that triggers the transition of the gaming state to the low-probability time-saving gaming state when selected in the normal gaming state is selected in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. In such a case, it is possible to suitably control the definite display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the time saving loss.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the number of time reductions is not added when a loss with a time reduction is selected by a special symbol lottery in a low-probability time-saving game state, but the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment is configured. In the low-probability time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times can be changed when a loss with a time-saving is selected by a special symbol lottery.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the first to third embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The configuration described below in the fourth embodiment may be added to the configurations provided in the pachinko machines 100 of the first to third embodiments described above, or the configurations described below from the first embodiment to the third embodiment may be added. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment (fourth embodiment) is in a normal gaming state (more specifically, the first normal game) like the pachinko machines 100 of the first to third embodiments described above. When the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery, 2nd special symbol lottery) is selected and the loss is selected, or the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. When the number of times assisting condition is satisfied when the number of times of the auxiliary function reaches the number of times of operation of the auxiliary function, the player shifts (transitions) to the low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 15 or 20).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is the special gaming state when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the case of each pachinko machine 100 in the first to third embodiments described above. When the number of consecutive non-winning games by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of time reductions or the number of times of assistance end time reduction, the game shifts to the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state ( (See FIG. 15 or FIG. 20).

FIG. 23 is a screen transition diagram showing screen transitions according to the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery described later in the low probability time saving game state.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment makes it possible to change the number of time reductions according to the lottery result of the time reduction number change lottery, which draws whether or not to change the number of time reductions when a loss with a time reduction is selected by a special symbol lottery. It is composed.

The lottery for changing the number of time reductions includes a lottery result that continues without changing the number of time reductions (hereinafter, the lottery result is also referred to as a "continuation result") and a lottery result that increases the number of time reductions (hereinafter, the lottery result). Is also referred to as an “increase result”) and a lottery result for ending the low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter, the lottery result is also referred to as an “end result”). The distribution probability (selection ratio) of each lottery result in the time saving number change lottery is, for example, the continuation result is about 5/10, the increase result is about 4/10, and the end result is about 1/10.

A loop counter for performing the time reduction number change lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “time reduction number change lottery counter”) is provided on the main control board 920, and the main control board 920 periodically uses the time reduction number change lottery counter. Every time the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is executed in the low-probability time-saving game state, the value of the time-saving number change lottery counter is acquired.

The main control board 920 controls the gaming state according to the value acquired from the time saving number change lottery counter. Specifically, when the value acquired from the lottery counter is a value set as a continuation result in advance, the main control board 920 does not change the number of time reductions (that is, changes the remaining number of time reductions). (No) Continue the low-probability time-saving game state. That is, in such a case, the main control board 920 reduces the remaining number of time reductions by one while maintaining the game state in the low-probability time-saving gaming state after the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery.

Further, when the value acquired from the time reduction number change lottery counter is a value set in advance as an increase result, the main control board 920 selects an increase in the time reduction number in the low probability time reduction game state, and determines the time reduction number. Increase by the number of times (for example, 100 times).

When an increase result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, the time reduction number does not necessarily have to be increased by a fixed number such as 100 times, and the remaining number of time reduction times is reset to the maximum value. It may be a configuration. In addition, the number of times of increase in the number of time reductions when an increase result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery does not necessarily have to be one type, and a plurality of types of increase results are provided and the number of times according to the increase result of the selected type. May be configured to increase the number of times in a short time.

Further, when the value acquired from the time reduction number change lottery counter is a value set in advance as the end result, the main control board 920 selects the end of the low probability time reduction game state and has a special symbol corresponding to the lottery. After the variation display, the low-probability time-saving game state is terminated, and the game state is shifted to the normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state) according to the state of the number auxiliary flag.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery in the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state. It should be noted that the effect has a predetermined probability of less than 100% (for example, a probability of approximately 1/4) by a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the effect each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability time-saving game state. ) May be selected for execution, or may be executed every time the variation display of the special symbol is executed (that is, with a 100% probability) in the low-probability time-saving game state. ..

For example, when the continuation result is selected in the time saving number change lottery (that is, when the continuation of the low probability time saving gaming state is selected), as shown in FIG. 23 (A), it corresponds to the variation display of the special symbol. Then, in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479, the background of each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R whose decorative symbol fluctuates is yellow (corresponding to the hatching of diagonal lines falling to the right at wide intervals). After the effect of returning to the normal background (corresponding to no hatching) is executed after changing to, the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, when the increase result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery (that is, when the time reduction number increase in the low probability time reduction game state is selected), the case where the continuation result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery Different productions are performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in response to the variable display of the special symbol, each symbol sequence 680L, 680M, 680R in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The background of is changed in the order of yellow and red (corresponding to hatching with a narrower interval than the hatching of the diagonal line that corresponds to yellow), and then the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, when the end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery (that is, when the end of the low probability time reduction game state is selected), the increase result is selected even when the continuation result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery. A different effect is performed than when it is done. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in response to the variable display of the special symbol, each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R in which the decorative symbol fluctuates. The background of is changed from yellow to blue (corresponding to hatching with a narrower interval than the hatching with diagonal diagonal lines corresponding to yellow and red), and then from blue to black (corresponding to filled hatching). After the execution, the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol is different depending on the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery. Changes (changes in the number of time reductions according to the lottery result of the change in the number of time reductions) can be inferred separately by the effect of the variation display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, for example, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from misidentifying that the low-probability time-saving state continues even though the low-probability time-saving state ends. Further, for example, even though the number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state does not change, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from misidentifying that the number of time reductions increases.

In addition, the effect may not be executed according to the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery. Further, when the end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, the effect corresponding to the end result may not be performed, and the lottery result that does not increase the time reduction number such as the continuation result or the end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery. If it is done, the effect corresponding to the lottery result may not be performed.

In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (C), the decorative symbol is changed as an effect suggesting the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery in the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state. An example is illustrated in which the display mode (for example, the display color) of the background of each of the symbol rows 680L, 680M, and 680R changes in a pattern according to the lottery result of the time saving number change lottery. The display is not limited to the change in the display mode of the background of the 680M and 680R. There may be.

Further, a light guide plate having translucency is provided on the front side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and as an effect suggesting each lottery result of the time saving number change lottery in the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state. The light guide plate may be configured to emit light in a color or a color pattern according to the lottery result of the time saving change lottery.

Further, instead of the decorative symbol display device 479 provided with a liquid crystal screen, in a pachinko machine that performs variable display and definite display of decorative symbols by a plurality of rows of cylindrical reels arranged in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction, the reels in each row are used. A light guide plate having a shape that curves along the arc of each reel in a cross-sectional view is provided on the front side, and the light guide plate emits light in a color or a color pattern according to a lottery result of a change in the number of time reductions. May be.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result (continuation result, end result) that does not increase the number of time reductions is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, at the timing of performing the final display after the variation display of the decorative symbol. , Display the decorative design of a specific combination (for example, a combination in which the numbers "1", "1", and "4" are lined up from left to right) corresponding to the time saving loss is difficult to see or invisible. It is composed.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 23, when the continuation result and the end result are selected in the time saving number change lottery, FIG. 23 (A) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (C), by superimposing a semi-transparent image on the front side of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R, a specific combination corresponding to a time saving loss is configured. The contents of each decorative pattern to be used are configured to be difficult to see.

As a result, even if the time-saving loss is selected by the special symbol lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state, the game is played in a situation where the time-saving number is not added (increased) due to the continuation result or the end result in the time-saving number change lottery. It is possible to prevent a person from recognizing a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a time-saving loss as a definite display. Therefore, even though the number of time reductions is not added, it is possible to suppress the player who recognizes that the loss with time reduction is selected in the special symbol lottery from expecting the addition of the number of time reductions.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 23, there is a case where the continuation result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery and the case where the end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery. The ease of recognizing (easiness of seeing) the content of the finalized display of each decorative symbol constituting the specific combination is different.

Specifically, when the continuation result is selected in the time saving number change lottery, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), at the timing of performing the final display after the variable display of the decorative symbol, the front side of each decorative symbol When the overlapping translucent images are dark colors (for example, black) with high transparency and the end result is selected in the time saving number change lottery, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the said image. At the timing, the translucent image that overlaps the front side of each decorative symbol is regarded as a dark color image having lower transparency than when the continuation result is selected. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the difference in transparency of the translucent image overlapping on the front side of each decorative symbol is expressed by the hatching interval of the diagonal line downward to the left.

As a result, when the end result is selected in the time saving number change lottery, compared to the case where the continuation result is selected in the time saving number change lottery, each decorative symbol constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss is Since the content of the confirmation display becomes difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the confirmation display. In other words, among the situations where the time reduction number is not added as a result of the time reduction number change lottery, in the situation where the time reduction number is not added and the low probability time reduction state ends, each decorative symbol constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time reduction loss is formed. It is possible to make it most difficult for the player to recognize the content of the confirmation display of.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player selects the loss with a time reduction by the special symbol lottery in the low probability time reduction game state, but the time reduction number is not added as a result of the time reduction number change lottery. The number of time reductions is not added, but the situation where the low-probability time-saving game state continues and the situation where the low-probability time-saving state ends are the contents of the final display of each decorative symbol that constitutes a specific combination corresponding to the time reduction loss. It can be inferred by distinguishing it by the difference in visibility.

Further, depending on whether the continuation result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery or the end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, the front side of each decorative symbol at the timing of performing the final display after the variation display of the decorative symbol. Not only is the transparency of the translucent image that overlaps with the image different, but the combination of the transparency of the image and the background of each symbol sequence 680L, 680M, 680R is also different. Although it is not done, the situation where the low-probability time-saving game state is continued and the situation where the low-probability time-saving state ends are easy to see. It can be inferred by the difference.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (C), each decorative symbol (number) constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time saving and loss at the timing of performing the final display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. "1" or "4") is a mode that is more difficult to see than when a loss is selected by a special symbol lottery in a normal game state (for example, a color close to the background color). Is high, etc.). Therefore, also in this respect, when a lottery result that does not increase the number of time reductions is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the content of the final display of each decorative symbol constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time reduction loss. Has been done.

By superimposing an opaque image on the front side of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R, the content of the final display of each decorative symbol constituting a specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss. May be configured to make the image invisible. An opaque image on the front side of each decorative symbol that constitutes a specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss at the timing of performing the final display after the variable display of the decorative symbol when the end result is selected in the time reduction frequency change lottery. When the content of the finalized display of each decorative symbol is invisible and the continuation result is selected in the time saving number change lottery, a semi-transparent image is superimposed on the front side of each decorative symbol. The content of the final display of each decorative pattern may be difficult to see.

The probability of making the finalized display of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R difficult to see or invisible is not necessarily 100%, and is determined by a predetermined lottery. The content of the definite display of the decorative symbol may be difficult to see or invisible with a probability (for example, a probability of about 1/2).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), when a lottery result (increase result) for increasing the number of time reductions is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, it corresponds to the loss due to the time reduction. The structure is such that the definite display of the decorative symbols of a specific combination is displayed with good visibility. As a result, a favorable situation (specifically, an increase in the number of time reductions) similar to the situation (that is, the occurrence of the time reduction state) that occurs when the decorative symbol of the combination is confirmed and displayed in the normal game state has occurred. You can make the player guess.

In addition, when the continuation result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, when the increase result is selected, the final display of the decorative symbol of a specific combination corresponding to the time reduction loss may be displayed with good visibility. good. This makes it possible for the player to infer that at least the time saving state has been continued.

Here, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when an increase result or an end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery during the low probability time reduction game state, the time reduction number (that is, the normal game state) is set according to the selected lottery result. If the number of times until returning is set to be different from the current number of time reductions, the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol, which is the end condition in the low-probability time reduction game state, changes accordingly.

For example, when the end result is selected in the time reduction number change lottery, the current number of executions of the variation display of the special symbol becomes the end condition in the low probability time reduction game state, and the end time of the low probability time reduction game is accelerated. .. On the other hand, when the increase result is selected in the time saving number change lottery, the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol which is the end condition in the low probability time saving game state increases, thereby delaying the end time of the low probability time saving game. .. As a result, it is possible to add a game property in which the end time of the low-probability time-saving game is earlier or later, and the low-probability time-saving game state can be suitably diversified.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the number of time reductions can be changed according to the lottery result of the time reduction number change lottery when the loss with time reduction is selected by the special symbol lottery in the low probability time reduction game state has been illustrated. It is not always necessary to be limited to being able to change the number of time reductions when a time reduction loss is selected by a special symbol lottery, and a loss (time reduction loss, no time reduction loss) is selected by a special symbol lottery in a low-probability time-saving game state. If this is the case, the number of time reductions may be changed according to the lottery result of the time reduction number change lottery.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the case where the number of time reductions can be changed according to the lottery result of the time reduction number change lottery when the loss with time reduction is selected by the special symbol lottery in the low probability time reduction game state has been illustrated. A lottery to select whether to end the low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving end lottery"), or a lottery to select whether to increase the number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving end lottery"). At least one of the "time reduction number increase lottery") is executed, and depending on the lottery result, the low probability time reduction game state is terminated, or the low probability time reduction game state is continued without changing the time reduction number. The number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state may be increased by a predetermined number of times.

The probability that the lottery result for ending the low-probability time-saving game state will be selected in the time-saving end lottery (that is, the probability that the end of the low-probability time-saving game state will be selected) can be set to, for example, approximately 1/10. Further, the probability that the lottery result for increasing the number of time reductions will be selected in the lottery for increasing the number of time reductions (that is, the probability that the increase in the number of time reductions in the low probability time reduction game state will be selected) can be set to, for example, approximately 4/10.

Further, instead of the lottery for increasing the number of time reductions, a lottery for selecting whether or not to reduce the number of time reductions in the low probability time reduction game state is executed, and when the lottery result for reducing the number of time reductions is selected by the lottery, the lottery results are selected. When a lottery result is selected that reduces the number of time reductions by a predetermined number of times in the low-probability time-saving game state and does not reduce the number of time reductions (that is, does not change the number of time reductions), the number of time reductions is not changed. It may be configured to continue the game state.

In addition, in the configuration including both the time saving end lottery and the above-mentioned time saving number increase lottery, the lottery result for changing the time saving number in both lottery (that is, the lottery result for ending the low probability time saving game state, or the time saving number is increased. When the lottery result) is selected, one of the lottery results may be prioritized. For example, the lottery result for ending the low-probability time-saving game state selected in the time-saving end lottery may be prioritized. For example, when the lottery result for ending the low-probability time-saving game state is selected in the time-saving end lottery Even when the lottery result for increasing the number of time reductions is selected in the lottery for increasing the number of time reductions, the low-probability time-saving game state may be terminated after the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery. On the other hand, the lottery result for increasing the number of time reductions selected in the time reduction number increase lottery may be prioritized. For example, when the lottery result for increasing the time reduction number is selected in the time reduction number increase lottery, the time reduction ends. Even if the lottery result for ending the low-probability time-saving game state is selected in the lottery, the number of time-savings is increased without ending the low-probability time-saving game state after the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery. May be.

In the pachinko machine 100 of such a modified example, when a time-saving loss is selected by a special symbol lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state, and a lottery result for ending the low-probability time-saving game state is selected in the time-saving end lottery. After the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result, the low-probability gaming state can be terminated, and the gaming state can be changed from the low-probability time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. As a result, the end time of the low-probability time-saving game state can be advanced according to the lottery result of the time-saving end lottery, and the game property that can advance the end time of the low-probability time-saving game can be added. Even with such a configuration, the low-probability time-saving gaming state can be suitably diversified.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the modified example, when a loss with a time reduction is selected by a special symbol lottery in a low probability time reduction game state, a lottery result for increasing the number of time reductions is selected in the time reduction number increase lottery. Can be increased by a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). As a result, the end time of the low-probability time-saving game state can be delayed according to the lottery result of the lottery for increasing the number of time-saving times, and the game property that can delay the end time of the low-probability time-saving game form can be added. Depending on the configuration, the low-probability time-saving gaming state can be suitably diversified.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the above Embodiment In the above embodiment, the ball passage portion 641 arranged in the front-rear direction (the side closer to the player and the side far from the player) on the upper left side of the central structure 420. , 642 are provided, and the ball passage portions 661 and 662 arranged in the front-rear direction are provided on the upper right side of the central structure 420. The ball passage portion may be provided only on the upper left side of the central structure 420, or may be provided only on the upper right side of the central structure 420. Further, the structure is not limited to the upper left side and the upper right side of the central structure 420, and a two-path ball passage portion arranged in the front-rear direction may be provided at an appropriate position in the game area.

In the above embodiment, the ball passage portion 642,662 is provided at a position where a part thereof overlaps the ball passage portion 641,661 in the front view, but the ball passage portion 642,662 is the ball passage portion 641. , 661 may be configured to substantially overlap in front view. As a result, the area occupied by the ball passage portions 641, 642 or the ball passage portions 661 and 662 in the plane direction can be reduced to the minimum level.

In the above embodiment, the ball passage portions 641,661 are configured to have a length in the width direction that allows the game balls to pass through one by one, but the length in the width direction of the ball passage portions 641,661 is , It is not always necessary that the length allows the game balls to pass through one by one, and the length may be such that a plurality of game balls arranged in the width direction can pass at the same time. By setting the length of the ball passage portions 641, 661 in the width direction to be a length that allows the game balls to pass through one by one, it is possible to suppress the region occupied by the ball passage portions 641, 661 in the surface direction of the game region. Since it is possible, it is possible to suitably secure an area for arranging various structures such as the central structure 420 on the central side of the game area.

In the above embodiment, of the ball passage portions 641 and 642 arranged in the front-rear direction, the ball passage portion 641 provided on the front side (the side closer to the player) is provided on the front (front) side of the substrate 401. However, the ball passage portion 641 may be provided on the back surface (rear surface) side of the substrate 401 in the same manner as the ball passage portion 642. That is, the ball passage portions 641 and 642 may be two-path ball passage portions arranged in the front-rear direction on the back surface side of the substrate 401. Similarly, the ball passage portion 661 may have a configuration in which the ball passage portion 661 is provided on the back side of the substrate 401.

In the above embodiment, the inlet 642A and the outlet 642B of the ball passage portion 642 are both arranged on the central side of the game area (the side away from the peripheral edge of the game area) with respect to the ball passage portion 641. One of the inlet 642A and the outlet 642B may be provided on the central side of the game area with respect to the ball passage portion 641, and the other may be provided on the peripheral side of the game area with respect to the ball passage portion 641. Further, both the inlet 642A and the outlet 642B may be provided on the peripheral side of the game area with respect to the ball passage portion 641.

Similarly, for the inlet 662A and the outlet 662B of the ball passage portion 662, one of the inlet 662A and the outlet 662B is provided on the central side of the game area with respect to the ball passage portion 661, and the other is provided with respect to the ball passage portion 661. It may be configured to be provided on the peripheral side of the region, or both the inlet 662A and the outlet 662B may be provided on the peripheral side of the game area with respect to the ball passage portion 661.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state. The winning probability of is not necessarily the same as the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state, is lower than the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the probabilistic game state, and is the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state. It may be in a state higher than the winning probability.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game board 700 (base 720) is provided with the central opening 711 and the two outer openings 712 and 713 is illustrated, but the game board 700 (base 720) is not necessarily provided on both the left and right sides with respect to the central opening 711. It is not necessary to provide the outer openings 712 and 713, one or both of the outer openings 712 and 713 may be omitted, or the central opening 711 may be divided in the vertical or horizontal direction to provide a plurality of openings. The central opening 711 may be formed by the portion. Further, it is not always necessary to display the information displayed in the plurality of openings 711 to 713 by the display image of one display device, and a display device is provided for each of the openings 711 to 713. Information may be displayed to a plurality of openings by using the above display device.

In the first embodiment, when a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery in the normal game state, a decorative symbol consisting of a specific combination corresponding to the time-saving loss is confirmed and displayed, and the low-probability gaming state is obtained. In the special symbol lottery, when the time saving loss is selected, the decorative symbols of the combination that does not correspond to the time saving loss (that is, the combination different from the specific combination corresponding to the time saving loss) are confirmed and displayed. However, regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a time-saving state such as a low-probability gaming state, a decorative symbol consisting of a specific combination corresponding to the time-saving loss may be confirmed and displayed. good.

In the first embodiment, the number-of-times assisting condition is not satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state, but the number-of-times assisting condition may be satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, when the number of consecutive non-winning in the special symbol lottery reaches the number of times the auxiliary function is operated (for example, 299 times), the number of times auxiliary flag may be set to off. .. As a result, when the number-of-times auxiliary condition is satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the low-probability time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, the transition destination normal game state becomes the first. It becomes the normal game state of 2. It should be noted that the "predetermined end condition" may be the number of time reductions according to the type of the symbol with the time reduction and the loss, or may be the number of times of the auxiliary end time reduction. Further, it is not always necessary to set the number-of-times auxiliary flag, and it may be determined whether or not it is in the second normal gaming state by referring to another information. For example, a counter that counts the number of times the auxiliary function is operated is initially set. The state may be determined depending on the case where the value is "0" to "299" or less, which corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary function is operated, and the case where the number of times auxiliary condition is exceeded "299".

In the first embodiment, when the time saving loss is selected by the special symbol lottery at the start of the operation of the number assist function and during the operation (during the low probability time saving game state which is the time saving state), the time saving loss is the game. It may be configured to be controlled so as to be advantageous to the person.

For example, if a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery at the end of the low-probability time-saving game state that has transitioned due to the establishment of the number-of-times assistance condition, the remaining number of times until the assistance end time-saving number is reached and the time-saving loss Compare with the number of time reductions according to the type of symbol, and if the number of time reductions according to the type of symbol has more time reduction, the time reduction loss is effective, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is subsequently changed. There may be a configuration in which the end condition of the low-probability time-saving game state is satisfied when the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving loss is reached. As a result, the end time of the low-probability time-saving game state can be extended by the difference between the remaining number of times until the auxiliary end time reduction number is reached and the time reduction number according to the time reduction loss.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 having a configuration in which the number-of-times assist condition is satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state as described above, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state when the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery in the normal game state. In the case of a transition, if the number-of-times assisting condition is satisfied during the low-probability time-saving game state, the number-of-times assisting function is activated, and as a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of times of assisting end time-saving. The configuration may be such that the end condition of the low-probability time-saving gaming state is satisfied. As a result, the end time of the low-probability time-saving game state can be extended by the difference between the remaining number of times until the time-saving number of times corresponding to the time-saving loss is reached and the auxiliary end time-saving number of times.

In the first embodiment, the low-probability time-saving game state shifts between the case where the number-of-times assist function is activated and the case where the time-saving loss is selected, and in both cases, it fluctuates with the same special figure fluctuation time. The case where the display is executed has been explained, but the special figure fluctuation time seems to differ depending on the type (trigger) of the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state, such as when the number-of-times assist function is activated and when the loss with time reduction is selected. Alternatively, the special figure fluctuation time may be different depending on the number of time reductions when the time reduction loss is selected. For example, when the number-of-times assist function is activated, it may be controlled so that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than when the time-saving loss is selected, and when the time-saving loss is selected, the number of time reductions is large. It may be controlled so that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter when the time is longer than when the time is less and shorter. In order, the special figure fluctuation time may be set so that the special figure fluctuation time becomes shorter (or longer). In this case, a low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of executions is small (or low probability) (for example, when the number-of-times assist function is activated) is a low-probability time-saving game that is executed many times (or high probability). The special figure fluctuation time may be controlled to be shorter than the state (for example, when a loss with a short time is selected), whereby the rare game state can be easily digested in a short time, and the game state can be easily digested. Can increase the rarity of.

In addition, when a plurality of special figure fluctuation times are set according to the type (trigger) of transition to the low-probability time-saving game state, the set one or more special figure fluctuation times are set to the probabilistic game state or the probabilistic change. It is preferable to set it to be the same as the special figure fluctuation time in at least a part of the later time shortened game state. As a result, a part of the control related to the special symbol can be easily shared between the low-probability time-saving game state, the probabilistic change game state, and the post-probability change time-shortening game state. For example, when the game shifts to the probabilistic game state or the reduced working hours state after the probabilistic change, the number-of-times assist function may be activated to control the special figure fluctuation time to be the same as the shifted low-probability time-shortening game state. ..

In addition, for the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state after the probability change, a plurality of times are set as the special figure fluctuation time as in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the special figure fluctuation time is set according to the winning type such as the number of rounds of the jackpot. In this case, the higher the number of rounds of the jackpot, the shorter the special figure fluctuation time may be, and the smaller the number of executions (or the lower the probability) of the special figure, the shorter the special figure. The fluctuation time may be shortened, and it is preferable to set two or more types of special figure fluctuation times to the same time in the low-probability time-shortening gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state (or the probability-changing time-saving gaming state).

In the first embodiment, the content of the effect in the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be different between the first normal game state and the second normal game state, for example. A predetermined effect such as a character that is not displayed in the first normal game state may be displayed in the second normal game state. Further, the probability that the loss with a short time is selected may be different between the first normal game state and the second normal game state. For example, the second normal game state is the first normal game. It may be configured so that there is a shorter time than the state and there is a high probability that a loss is easily selected. Further, the number of time reductions (or the expected value of the number of time reductions) when the time reduction loss is selected may be different between the first normal game state and the second normal game state, for example, the second. The normal game state of No. 1 may be configured to have a longer time reduction than the first normal game state, and the number of time reductions when loss is selected may be longer.

(2) Modification example of the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment In the above third embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the short-time game state after the hit via latency is the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state. Although the configurations are the same, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the short-time game state after the hit via latent probability does not necessarily have to be the same as the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state, and the probability changes. It may be in a state lower than the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the game state and higher than the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal game state.

In the third embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery in the short-time game state after the hit-via latent probability is the same as the winning probability of the special symbol lottery in the probabilistic game state. The winning probability of the special symbol lottery in the late-time short-time gaming state does not necessarily have to be the same as the winning probability of the special symbol lottery in the probabilistic gaming state, and is higher than the winning probability of the special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. It may be in a state lower than the winning probability of the special symbol lottery in the probabilistic game state.

In the third embodiment, the total opening time of the lower entry control mechanism 452 when the normal symbol lottery is won is calculated from the total opening time in the low probability time-saving game state. Although it is configured to have a long time length, the total opening time of the lower entry control mechanism 452 when winning the normal symbol lottery in the time-saving game state after the hit via latency is the total opening time in the low-probability time-saving game state. It may be a shorter time length, and the total opening time of the lower entry control mechanism 452 and the total opening time in the low-probability time-saving game state when the normal symbol lottery is won in the time-shortening game state after the hit via latent probability. May be the same time length. In this case, it is possible to bring the advantageous degree of the operation of the lower approach regulation mechanism 452 closer to the low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving game state after the hit via latent probability. Therefore, even in different advantageous game states, the consumption amount of the game balls required for winning can be brought close to evenly without a large difference, and the consumption amount of the game balls is suppressed to a small amount in a plurality of types of advantageous game states. Can provide sex.

In the third embodiment, the case where the time-saving gaming state after the hit-via latency is generated via the latent probability-changing gaming state that occurs after the special gaming state has been illustrated. Instead of, or in addition to the time-saving game state after the hit via latency, after the special game state, the lottery probability of the normal symbol lottery, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol after the hit via latency The configuration may be such that the game shifts to the time-saving game state, which is controlled in the same manner as the time-saving game state.

In the third embodiment, there are five types of advantageous gaming states that can occur (that is, a special gaming state, a probabilistic variable gaming state, a low-probability time-saving gaming state, a hit-via time-saving gaming state, a latent probabilistic gaming state, and a latent probability-changing gaming state. Although the time-saving gaming state after the probability of hitting is illustrated, a configuration in which some of these five types of advantageous gaming states may be omitted may be used. For example, the advantageous gaming states that can occur are the special gaming state, the time-saving gaming state corresponding to the low-probability time-saving gaming state that occurs after the normal gaming state, and the time-saving gaming that corresponds to the hit-via time-saving gaming state that occurs after the special gaming state. There may be three types of states: a special gaming state, a time-saving gaming state corresponding to the latent probability-changing gaming state that occurs after the special gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state that corresponds to the hit-via time-saving gaming state that occurs after the latent probability-changing gaming state. There may be three types of gaming states.

In the third embodiment, the number-of-times assisting function does not operate in the latent probability-changing gaming state, but the number-of-times assisting function may be configured to be operable in the latent-probability-changing gaming state. That is, when the number of consecutive non-winnings selected by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number during the latent probability change game state, the number of times subsidy condition is satisfied, and after the variation display corresponding to the non-winning is completed, It transitions from the latent probability change game state to the time-saving game state after the hit via latent probability. In the latent probability variation game state, the winning probability in the special symbol lottery is a special symbol high probability state, and it is easier to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery than in the normal game state in which the special symbol low probability state. It is preferable to set the number of times of variation display of the special symbol for operating the number-of-times assist function in the state (that is, the number of times the auxiliary function is operated) to be less than the number of times the auxiliary function is operated in the normal gaming state.

In the third embodiment, when the time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery, the time saving is performed regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time saving state such as the low probability gaming state. The decorative symbol consisting of a specific combination corresponding to the loss is fixedly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but if the time reduction is selected in the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state, the time reduction is lost. The decorative symbol of the combination that does not correspond to (that is, the combination that is different from the specific combination that corresponds to the time saving loss) may be fixedly displayed.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the number-of-times assisting condition is not satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state, but the number-of-times assisting condition may be satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, when the number of consecutive non-winning in the special symbol lottery reaches the number of times the auxiliary function is operated (for example, 299 times), the number of times auxiliary flag may be set to off. .. As a result, when the number-of-times auxiliary condition is satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the low-probability time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state, the transition destination normal game state becomes the first. It becomes the normal game state of 2. It should be noted that the "predetermined end condition" may be the number of time reductions according to the type of the symbol with the time reduction and the loss, or may be the number of times of the auxiliary end time reduction.

In the third embodiment, when the time saving loss is selected by the special symbol lottery at the start of the operation of the number assist function and during the operation (during the low probability time saving game state which is the time saving state), the time saving loss is the game. It may be configured to be controlled so as to be advantageous to the person.

For example, if a time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery at the end of the low-probability time-saving game state that has transitioned due to the establishment of the number-of-times assistance condition, the remaining number of times until the assistance end time-saving number is reached and the time-saving loss Compare with the number of time reductions according to the type of symbol, and if the number of time reductions according to the type of symbol has more time reduction, the time reduction loss is effective, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is subsequently changed. There may be a configuration in which the end condition of the low-probability time-saving game state is satisfied when the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving loss is reached. As a result, the end time of the low-probability time-saving game state can be extended by the difference between the remaining number of times until the auxiliary end time reduction number is reached and the time reduction number according to the time reduction loss.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 having a configuration in which the number-of-times assist condition is satisfied in the low-probability time-saving game state as described above, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state when the time-saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery in the normal game state. In the case of a transition, if the number-of-times assisting condition is satisfied during the low-probability time-saving game state, the number-of-times assisting function is activated, and as a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of times of assisting end time-saving. The configuration may be such that the end condition of the low-probability time-saving gaming state is satisfied. As a result, the end time of the low-probability time-saving game state can be extended by the difference between the remaining number of times until the time-saving number of times corresponding to the time-saving loss is reached and the auxiliary end time-saving number of times.

(3) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Fourth Embodiment In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, when a time-saving loss is selected by a special symbol lottery in a low-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after the variable display. An example is made of a configuration in which the contents of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R are invisible or difficult to see at the timing of being displayed. Instead of or in addition to that, there is a time reduction due to a special symbol lottery in a game state in a time saving state other than the low probability time saving game state (probability variation game state, hit via time saving game state, hit via latent time saving game state). Similarly, when is selected, the content of each decorative symbol displayed in each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R is set at the timing when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after the variable display, as in the case of the low-probability time-saving game state. It may be configured to be invisible or difficult to see.

In the fourth embodiment, the configuration in which the time reduction number increase lottery or the time reduction end lottery is executed each time the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed in the low probability time saving game state is illustrated. Instead of or in addition to that, there is a time reduction due to a special symbol lottery in a game state (probability variation game state, hit via time saving game state, hit via latent time saving game state) other than the low probability time saving game state. When is selected, at least one of the time saving number increase lottery and the time saving end lottery may be executed in the same manner as in the case of the low probability time saving game state.

In the fourth embodiment, the game state shifts to the normal game state when the number of consecutive non-winnings by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined time-saving number in the low-probability time-saving game state. In the case of providing a configuration in which the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state when the player is elected, the configuration may be such that the end condition of the low-probability time-saving gaming state due to the number of time-saving times is not provided.

In the fourth embodiment, whether or not to increase the number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state each time the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed in the low-probability time-saving game state. The configuration for executing the time reduction number increase lottery, which is the lottery to be selected, has been described. In addition, a lottery for reducing the number of time reductions, which is a lottery for selecting whether or not to reduce the number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state, may be executed. When the lottery for reducing the number of time reductions is won, the number of time reductions may be reduced by a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

In addition, instead of the time reduction number increase lottery or the time reduction number decrease lottery, or in addition to the time reduction number increase lottery or the time reduction number decrease lottery, each time a special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability time reduction game state, the low probability time reduction game A lottery for changing the number of time reductions, which is a lottery for selecting whether or not to change the number of time reductions in the state, may be executed. The time reduction number change lottery is a lottery that includes a lottery result that increases the time reduction number by a predetermined number, a lottery result that reduces the time reduction number by a predetermined number, and a lottery result that does not change the time reduction number. be.

In addition, in the lottery executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability time saving game state, the lottery result for increasing the number of time saving (for example, winning by the time saving number increasing lottery, increasing the time saving number in the time saving number change lottery). When the lottery result) is selected, or when the lottery result that increases or decreases the number of time reductions (winning in the time reduction number reduction lottery, the lottery result that reduces the time reduction number in the time reduction number change lottery) is selected, or the time reduction number is selected. When the lottery result that does not decrease (non-winning in the time reduction number increase lottery, non-winning in the time reduction number decrease lottery, lottery result that does not change the time reduction number in the time reduction number change lottery) is selected, each symbol row 680L, 680M, 680R The effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern depending on the background color of the above may be different. As a result, the player can make a distinction between the former case and the latter case by the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol, so that, for example, the number of time reductions in the low probability time reduction state is reduced or does not change. However, if the number of time reductions increases, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from misidentifying.

In the fourth embodiment, the time reduction number change lottery is performed by the value of a dedicated counter (time reduction number change lottery counter) provided for performing the time reduction number change lottery, but the time reduction number change lottery is performed. , A counter for performing a special symbol lottery (a winning random number counter related to a special symbol) or the like may be configured to be performed by the value of a counter provided in the conventional pachinko machine 100. For example, among the values of the winning random number counter, a value corresponding to the continuation result, a value corresponding to the increase result, and a value corresponding to the end result are provided, and the value of the winning random number counter is referred to in the low probability time saving game state. By doing so, a lottery for changing the number of time reductions may be performed.

In the fourth embodiment, when the time saving loss is selected in the special symbol lottery, the time saving is performed regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time saving state such as the low probability gaming state. The decorative symbol consisting of a specific combination corresponding to the loss is fixedly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but if the time reduction is selected in the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state, the time reduction is lost. The decorative symbol of the combination that does not correspond to (that is, the combination that is different from the specific combination that corresponds to the time saving loss) may be fixedly displayed.

In the fourth embodiment, as a case where a time saving function with electric support is added from the latent probability changing game state, a special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the latent probability changing game state is won and the game is played. The big winning device 433 may include a sudden big hit that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state after performing a short-time opening operation so that the person cannot win the prize ball. In this case, the transition between a game state in which a time saving function is added by a sudden big hit (probability variation game state) and a game state in which a time saving function is added due to a loss with a time saving (time saving game state after hitting latent probability) The content of the variation display at the time and the game state after the transition may be configured as follows. For example, the content of the variable display when the game state shifts may be different production contents, but the content of the variable display is the same for all, and the production content is the same halfway, and whether or not the grand prize device is operated. Characters such as "high probability of winning" and "high expectation" may be displayed so that the player can identify which state is in the time including.

Further, the special figure fluctuation time may be the same in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state after the hit via latency, but it is preferable to set them differently, while (for example, the time-saving game state after the hit via latency). ) Is less than half of the other (for example, the probabilistic game state) because the difference in the game state can be clarified. It is preferable to control the expected value to be long. Further, at least a part of the control of determining the time of the variation display selected when shifting to the probability variation game state and the time-shortening game state after the hit via latency may be shared, for example, the selection of the variation display time. The same selection conditions may be used for the control of.

(4) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on the condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems, effects, and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A game area in which the game ball launched by the launching means (launching device 330) for launching the game ball flows down, and a side near the entrance of the game area and a side away from the entrance of the game ball that has entered the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a distribution unit (central structure 420) that can be distributed to.
A first ball passage (ball passage portion 641) through which game balls distributed to the side closer to the entrance by the distribution portion can flow down, and
A game ball distributed to the side closer to the entrance by the distribution unit can flow down, and at least a part thereof is provided on the back side far from the player with respect to the first ball passage, and the first ball is provided. A second ball passage (ball passage portion 642) provided with a section overlapping the ball passage on the back side is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that a player can select whether a game ball flows down the first ball passage or a game ball flows down the second ball passage.

<Feature 11>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by a launching means (launching device 330) that launches a gaming ball flows down.
A first ball passage (ball passage portion 641) through which a game ball that has entered the game area can flow down, and
A second ball passage (ball passage portion) provided with at least a part on the back side far from the player with respect to the first ball passage and a section overlapping the first ball passage on the back side. 642) and
A gaming machine characterized in that a player can select whether a game ball flows down the first ball passage or a game ball flows down the second ball passage.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In the game area, in addition to the game area where the game ball can flow down, a display device capable of displaying a variable display with a decorative pattern and an effect using characters, a movable accessory for the effect, and a central structure Various structures for entertaining the player's eyes, such as decorative structures such as, are arranged so that the player can see at least a part thereof from the front side.

However, since the gaming area is a limited area, there may still be room for improvement in making good use of the area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the feature 10 and the feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize the gaming area. That is, in a gaming machine provided with a distribution unit capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the game area to a side near the entrance of the game area and a side away from the entrance, the distribution unit is used to reach the entrance of the game area. A first ball passage and a second ball passage are provided as ball passages through which the game balls distributed to the closer side can flow down.

The second ball passage is provided with at least a part on the back side far from the player with respect to the first ball passage, and a section overlapping the first ball passage on the back side is provided, so that the second ball passage is provided. Compared with the case where the ball passage is provided side by side with the first ball passage in the game area (the area on the front side in the game board), the occupied area of the ball passage in the game area can be suppressed, and the display device and the display device can be reduced accordingly. It is possible to secure an area for arranging various structures such as movable accessories and decorative structures.

In the gaming machines described in the features 10 and 11, the "first ball passage through which the gaming balls distributed by the distribution section to the side closer to the entrance can flow down" is not necessarily the front side of the gaming area (that is, the first ball passage). , The ball passage is not required to be provided on the side of the surface close to the player, but is provided on the back surface side of the game area (that is, the side of the surface away from the player), and is provided at the entrance by the distribution unit. It may be a ball passage in which a game ball distributed to a closer side can flow down through an opening formed through the game area.

<Feature 20>
A game area in which the game ball launched by the launching means (launching device 330) for launching the game ball flows down, and a side near the entrance of the game area and a side away from the entrance of the game ball that has entered the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a distribution unit (central structure 420) that can be distributed to.
A ball passage through which the game balls distributed to the side closer to the entrance by the distribution portion can flow down, and at least a part of the ball passage is closer to the peripheral edge of the game area than one game ball. It is provided with a first ball passage (ball passage portion 641,661) provided so as to overlap with each other in front view.
A gaming machine characterized in that a player can select whether a game ball flows down the first ball passage or a game ball flows down a ball passage different from the first ball passage.

<Feature 21>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by a launching means (launching device 330) that launches a gaming ball flows down.
A first ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the game area can flow down, and at least a part of at least a part of the passage portion in the first ball passage is equivalent to one game ball with respect to the peripheral edge of the game area. The first ball passage (ball passage portion 641,661) provided so as to overlap the closer area in front view, and
A second ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the game area can flow down, and at least a part thereof is provided on the back side far from the player with respect to the first ball passage, and the first ball passage is provided. On the other hand, a second ball passage (ball passage portion 642,662) provided with an overlapping section on the back side is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that a player can select whether a game ball flows down the first ball passage or a game ball flows down the second ball passage.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In the game area, in addition to the game area where the game ball can flow down, a display device capable of displaying a variable display with a decorative pattern and an effect using characters, a movable accessory for the effect, and a central structure Various structures for entertaining the player's eyes, such as decorative structures such as, are arranged so that the player can see at least a part thereof from the front side.

However, since the gaming area is a limited area, there may still be room for improvement in making good use of the area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the feature 20 and the feature 21, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize the gaming area. That is, the first ball passage and the second ball passage are provided as ball passages through which the game balls that have entered the game area can flow down. Of the first ball passage and the second ball passage, the second ball passage is provided at least partly on the back side far from the player with respect to the first ball passage, and is on the back side with respect to the first ball passage. Since the section overlapping the first ball passage is provided, the second ball passage is occupied in the game area (the area on the front side of the game board) as compared with the case where the second ball passage is provided side by side with the first ball passage. The area can be suppressed, and it is possible to secure an area for arranging various structures such as a display device, a movable accessory, and a decorative structure.

Further, the first ball passage is provided so that at least a part of the passage portion thereof overlaps with a region closer to the peripheral edge of the game region than one game ball in front view. Therefore, since the two-path ball passages (first ball passage and second ball passage) are provided on the peripheral side of the game area, the game area can be prevented from flowing down in a monotonous flow path. It is possible to secure an area for arranging various structures such as a display device, a movable accessory, and a decorative structure on the center side.

In the gaming machines described in the feature 20 and the feature 21, "the game ball that has entered the game area can flow down" is not necessarily provided on the front side of the game area (that is, the side close to the player). It does not have to be a ball passage, but is provided on the back surface side of the game area (that is, the side of the surface away from the player), and the game ball that has entered the game area passes through an opening formed through the game area. It may be a ball passage that can flow down.

<Feature 30>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
A first advantageous gaming state (probability variation) in which the period in which the second starting portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is set to a second time length longer than the first time length. (Game state) and
A second advantageous gaming state (low) in which the period in which the second starting portion is in a state in which the gaming ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is set to a third time length longer than the second time length. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with (probability time saving gaming state).

<Feature 31>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
A period in which the winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability, and the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won. Is a first advantageous gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which is a second time length longer than the first time length.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the first probability or a predetermined probability lower than the second probability, and when the winning in the first lottery is won, the second starting unit enters the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that a second advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is provided, in which a period in which an easy state is taken is a third time length longer than the second time length.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the feature 30 and the feature 31, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably generating a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. That is, there are a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different from that of the first starting portion in which the predetermined first lottery is performed when the game ball enters, and the predetermined second lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Is provided, and when a game ball enters the second starting portion, a variable display is performed on the display means, and the result of the second lottery is displayed after the variable display. The corresponding result information is displayed. The game state control means at least controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning section that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters. Then, control to generate a plurality of types of gaming states is executed.

In such a game machine, as a game state that can be generated by the game state control means, a winning easy game state including a period in which a variable winning unit is in a state in which a game ball can easily enter, which occurs when a player wins in the second lottery. , The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when winning in the first lottery is the predetermined first length. The normal game state is set to a predetermined second probability in which the winning probability in the first lottery is higher than the first probability, and the second starting portion easily enters the game ball when the first lottery is won. In addition to the provision of the first advantageous gaming state in which the period of taking the state is a second time length longer than the first time length, as another advantageous gaming state, the winning probability in the first lottery is The second time is a period in which the first probability or a predetermined probability lower than the second probability is set, and the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won. A second advantageous gaming state is provided, which is a third time length longer than the length. As a result, it is possible to generate a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states in which the overall period length of the game ball in a state in which it is easy to enter is not significantly different while making the winning probability different.

In the gaming machines described in the feature 30 and the feature 31, the "period in which the second starting portion is in a state where the gaming ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won" does not necessarily mean that the gaming ball enters. It does not have to be the period for each easy state, and may be the total of each period when the easy-to-enter state of the game ball occurs a plurality of times.

<Feature 40>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
When the game ball enters the first starting portion, the first variation display is performed, and after the first variation display, the first display that can display the first result information corresponding to the result of the first lottery is displayed. Means (ordinary symbol display device 473) and
A first display control means (main control board 920) that executes display control in the first display means, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A second display means (decoration) capable of displaying the second variation when the game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying the second result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the variation display. Design display device 479) and
A second display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the second display device, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, the period of the first fluctuation display is set to a predetermined first fluctuation time length, and the first lottery is won. 2 A normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state) in which the period during which the starting portion is in a state in which the game ball is easy to enter is a predetermined first easy entry time length, and
It is a gaming state that occurs when a predetermined condition (loss with time reduction, number of times auxiliary condition) is satisfied in the normal gaming state, and the winning probability in the first lottery is higher than the first probability or the first probability. A predetermined second probability, a predetermined second fluctuation time length in which the period of the first fluctuation display is shorter than the first fluctuation time length, and the first lottery when the first lottery is won. 2 An advantageous gaming state (low probability time saving state) is provided in which the period during which the starting portion is in a state in which the game ball is easily entered is a second easy approaching time length longer than the first easy approaching time length.
In the normal game state, when the control of the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion is executed by the game state control means, the next execution of the first variation display is performed after the control is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that a period longer than the first easy-to-enter time length is set as a waiting period until the above-mentioned first is allowed.

<Feature 41>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
When the game ball enters the first starting portion, the first variation display is performed, and after the first variation display, the first display that can display the first result information corresponding to the result of the first lottery is displayed. Means (ordinary symbol display device 473) and
A first display control means (main control board 920) that executes display control in the first display means, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A second display means (decoration) capable of displaying the second variation when the game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying the second result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the variation display. Design display device 479) and
A second display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the second display device, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, the period of the first fluctuation display is set to a predetermined first fluctuation time length, and the first lottery is won. 2 A normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state) in which the period during which the starting portion is in a state in which the game ball is easy to enter is a predetermined first easy entry time length, and
It is a game state that occurs when a predetermined condition (loss with a short time, operation condition of the number of times assist function) is satisfied in the normal game state, and the winning probability in the first lottery is the first probability or the first probability. When a higher predetermined second probability is set, the period of the first fluctuation display is set to a predetermined second fluctuation time length shorter than the first fluctuation time length, and the first lottery is won. An advantageous gaming state (low probability time saving state) is provided in which the period during which the second starting portion takes a state in which the game ball is easily entered is a second easy approaching time length longer than the first easy approaching time length. Be,
In the normal game state, when the control of the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion is executed by the game state control means, the next execution of the first variation display is performed after the control is completed. As a waiting period until the above is allowed, a period longer than the first easy entry time length is set.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the first variation display, and if the first lottery corresponding to the first variation display is won, the said after the end of the first variation display. A gaming machine characterized in that the period during which the second starting portion is in a state in which the gaming ball is easily entered is defined as the second easy-to-enter time length.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the feature 40 and the feature 41, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably switching from a normal gaming state to an advantageous gaming state. That is, there are a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different from that of the first starting portion in which the predetermined first lottery is performed when the game ball enters, and the predetermined second lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Is provided, and when the game ball enters the first starting portion, the first display means performs the first variation display, and after the first variation display, the first variation display is performed. The first result information corresponding to the result of the first lottery is displayed. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting portion, the second display means performs the second variation display, and the result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the second variation display. Is displayed. The game state control means at least controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning section that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters. Then, control to generate a plurality of types of gaming states is executed.

In such a game machine, as a game state that can be generated by the game state control means, a winning easy game state including a period in which the variable winning unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the game is won in the second lottery. , The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the predetermined first probability, the period of the first fluctuation display is set to the predetermined first fluctuation time length, and when the winning in the first lottery is won, the second starting unit A normal game state in which the period during which the game ball is in an easily accessible state is a predetermined first easy entry time length, and a predetermined game state in which the winning probability in the first lottery is higher than the first probability or the first probability. It is a second probability, and the period of the first fluctuation display is a predetermined second fluctuation time length shorter than the first fluctuation time length, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit plays a game. An advantageous gaming state is provided in which the period during which the ball is easily entered is set to the second easy-to-enter time length, which is longer than the first easy-to-enter time length.

The advantageous gaming state occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, and when the occurrence timing of the advantageous gaming state is in the first variation display, the first lottery corresponding to the first variation display is performed. If the player is elected, the period during which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter after the end of the first variation display is one of the benefits of the advantageous game state, that is, the second easy entry time. It becomes the length.

Here, in the normal game state, when the control of the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion is executed by the game state control means, the next first variation display is executed after the control is completed. As the waiting period until it is allowed, a period longer than the first easy entry time length is set. Therefore, by shortening the first fluctuation time by the amount of the waiting period, the winning rate for the second starting portion can be set low, and when an advantageous gaming state occurs during the first fluctuation display, It is possible to shorten the longest waiting time until the second starting portion takes a state in which the game ball can easily enter with the length of the second easy entry time. Therefore, according to the gaming machines described in the feature 40 and the feature 41, the longest waiting time until the player receives the privilege of the advantageous gaming state can be shortened while the winning rate for the second starting portion can be set low. Can be done.

In addition, in the feature 40 and the feature 41, "the normal game state is the next after the control of the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion is executed by the game state control means. Instead of the description of "a period longer than the first easy-to-enter time length is set as the waiting period until the execution of the first variation display is allowed", "the normal gaming state is the second start. When the control of the ease of entry of the game ball in the unit is executed by the game state control means, after the control of the ease of entry of the game ball is started by the game state control means, the following first The length of the difficult entry period is the length of the difficult entry period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the state in which the game ball is easy to enter in the period until the execution of the variation display is permitted. A period longer than the easy entry time is set. " In this case, the non-entry period is the second of the period from the start of control of the ease of entry of the game ball by the game state control means until the execution of the next first variation display is permitted. The time may be the time excluding (subtracted) the time when the starting portion takes a state in which the game ball can easily enter. Further, the control of the ease of entry of the game ball by the game state control means may be started at the timing when the stop time of the fluctuation display that triggered the start of the control has elapsed, and the game by the game state control means. It may be the timing when the opening period starts when controlling the ease of entry of the ball. Further, as the difficult entry period, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter from the state where the second starting portion is easy to enter after the control of the ease of entry of the game ball is started by the game state control means. It may be the opening period before the game ball becomes easy to enter, the interval period when the game ball easily enters multiple times, or the game ball. It may be the ending period after the easy-to-enter state is finished. Further, the period of the fluctuation display in the feature 40 and the feature 41 may be the fluctuation time or the sum of the fluctuation time and the stop time, and the fluctuation display ends after the fluctuation display of 1 is started. It may be a period until it is done.

<Feature 50>
A gaming machine provided with a launch passage (launch passage 401B) through which a game ball launched by a launching means (launch device 330) for launching a game ball passes, and a game area in which the game ball passing through the launch passage flows down. There,
The first flow-down area (the flow-down area 701 on the left side) where the game ball that has entered the game area can flow down, and
The second flow-down area (flow-down area 702 on the right side) that can flow down when the game ball is launched more strongly than the first flow-down area,
When viewed from the player side, a first display area (center side opening 711) provided between the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area and capable of displaying predetermined first information, and
Seen from the player side, a second display area (left outer opening 712) provided between the first flow-down area and the launch passage and capable of displaying second information different from the first information.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying the first information and the second information.

<Feature 51>
A game in which a launch passage (launch passage 401B) through which a game ball launched by a launch means (launch device 330) for launching a game ball passes and a game area in which the game ball passing through the launch passage flows down are formed on the front side. A gaming machine equipped with a region forming member (base 720).
The first flow-down area (the flow-down area 701 on the left side) where the game ball that has entered the game area can flow down, and
The second flow-down area (flow-down area 702 on the right side) that can flow down when the game ball is launched more strongly than the first flow-down area,
When viewed from the player side, a first display area (center side opening 711) provided between the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area and capable of displaying predetermined first information, and
A second display area (right outer opening 713) that is provided on a side away from the launch passage from the second flow-down area and can display second information different from the first information when viewed from the player side. ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying the first information and the second information.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In the game area, in addition to the game area where the game ball can flow down, a display device capable of displaying a variable display with a decorative pattern and an effect using characters, a movable accessory for the effect, and a central structure Various structures for entertaining the player's eyes, such as decorative structures such as, are arranged so that the player can see at least a part thereof from the front side.

However, since the gaming area is a limited area, there may still be room for improvement in making good use of the area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the feature 50 and the feature 51, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize the gaming area. That is, when viewed from the player side, the first information displayed in the first display area provided between the first flow-down area and the second flow-down area, and the first flow-down area or the second with respect to the first display area. The second information displayed in the second display area provided at the position where the flow-down area is interposed can be displayed by one display means. For this reason, it is easy to make the display contents on both sides of the flow area intervening, and the display contents with a sense of unity can be displayed in a part of the game area, so that the game area can be preferably used. Can be done.

<Feature 60>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is the first time length. The first advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state), which is longer than the second time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the second lottery in the second advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that a second advantageous gaming state (a time-saving gaming state after hit-via latency) is provided.

<Feature 61>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is the same as the winning probability in the second lottery in the normal gaming state. The first advantageous gaming state (probability variable gaming state), which has a probability or a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the first probability or a predetermined probability lower than the second probability, and when the winning in the first lottery is won, the second starting unit enters the game ball. A second advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) in which the period for taking an easy state is a second time length longer than the first time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the first probability or a predetermined probability lower than the second probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is the second in the second advantageous gaming state. A predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the lottery, and a period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is longer than the second time length. A gaming machine characterized in that a third advantageous gaming state (a short gaming state after hit-via latency), which has a time length of 3, is provided.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the features 60 and 61, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably generating a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. That is, there are a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different from that of the first starting portion in which the predetermined first lottery is performed when the game ball enters, and the predetermined second lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Is provided, and when a game ball enters the second starting portion, a variable display is performed on the display means, and the result of the second lottery is displayed after the variable display. The corresponding result information is displayed. The game state control means at least controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning section that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters. Then, control to generate a plurality of types of gaming states is executed.

In such a game machine, as a game state that can be generated by the game state control means, a winning easy game state including a period in which a variable winning portion is in a state in which a game ball can easily enter, which occurs when a player wins in the second lottery. , The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is the predetermined first time length. The normal game state and the winning probability in the first lottery are set to a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is the second lottery in the normal game state. In addition to being provided with a first advantageous gaming state having the same probability as the winning probability or a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability, as other advantageous gaming states, a second advantageous gaming state and a third advantageous gaming state are provided. A game state is provided.

In the second advantageous gaming state, the winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined probability lower than the first probability or the second probability, and when the winning in the first lottery is won, the second starting unit is a game ball. It is a gaming state in which the period (or the expected value of the length of the period) in which the player is easily entered is the second time length longer than the first time length.

In the third advantageous gaming state, the winning probability in the first lottery is a predetermined probability lower than the first probability or the second probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is in the second advantageous gaming state. A predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the second lottery, and a period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is longer than the second time length. It is a gaming state with a third time length.

In both the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state, the period in which the second starting unit is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is the period in the normal gaming state (the period in which the game ball is easily entered. Since the time length (second time length or third time length) is longer than the first time length), it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting portion than in the normal game state. can do. As a result, although the winning probability in the first lottery is as low as in the normal gaming state (more specifically, it is lower than the winning probability in the first advantageous gaming state), it goes to the second starting unit as compared with the normal gaming state. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous for the player because it is easy to win a prize.

In particular, the third advantageous gaming state has a higher probability of winning in the second lottery than the second advantageous gaming state, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting portion is the game ball. The period of easy entry is longer than the second time length. Therefore, as a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states in which the winning probability in the first lottery is suppressed to be low as in the normal gaming state, it is easier to win a prize in the second starting portion as compared with the second advantageous gaming state, and the second lottery is won. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states including another advantageous gaming state that is easy to play (that is, easy to transition to a winning easy gaming state).

Here, if a plurality of times are set as a period during which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won, the second start is performed when the first lottery is won. The period during which the part is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter may be the expected value of the length of the period. The expected value of the length of the period is, for example, the length of time that the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won, and the time length when the first lottery is won. It may be calculated by the sum of the values multiplied by the probability of being selected.

<Feature 62>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (lower start winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry of the game ball.
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is the same as the winning probability in the second lottery in the normal gaming state. The first advantageous gaming state (probability variable gaming state), which has a probability or a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the first probability or a predetermined probability lower than the second probability, and when the winning in the first lottery is won, the second starting unit enters the game ball. A second advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) in which the period for taking an easy state is a second time length longer than the first time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is set to the first probability or a predetermined probability lower than the second probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is the second in the second advantageous gaming state. A predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the lottery, and a period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is the same as the second time length. A gaming machine characterized in that an advantageous gaming state having a time length or a time length shorter than the second time length is provided.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 62, similarly to the gaming machines described in the features 60 and 61, a gaming machine capable of preferably generating a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player is provided. Can be done.

Further, the winning probability in the second lottery is higher than that in the second advantageous gaming state, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting portion takes a state in which the game ball can easily enter. An advantageous gaming state is provided that is equal to or shorter than the time length of. Therefore, as a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states in which the winning probability in the first lottery is suppressed to be low as in the normal gaming state, the ease of winning the second starting portion is equal to or less than that in the second advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in the second lottery, it is possible to generate a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states including another advantageous gaming state that is easy to win (that is, easy to transition to the winning easy gaming state).

In the gaming machines according to the features 60 to 62, the "period in which the second starting portion is in a state where the gaming ball is easy to enter when the first lottery is won" is not necessarily the period in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. It does not have to be the period of each state, and may be the total of the periods of each time when the state in which the game ball is easy to enter occurs a plurality of times.

<Feature 70>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit is made easy to enter the game ball and the game is played. A second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a ball enters, and
When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the first variation display (variation display of the special symbol) is performed, and after the first variation display, the first result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery. 1st display means (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the first display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
A normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state) in which the winning probability in the first lottery is a predetermined first probability, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the second lottery in the normal gaming state. Advantageous gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state),
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability. A second advantageous gaming state (a time-saving gaming state after hitting probability) is provided, which makes it easy for the player to enter.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the first advantageous gaming state (loss with a short time), the first advantageous gaming state is configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine.

<Feature 71>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit is made easy to enter the game ball and the game is played. A second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) in which a predetermined second lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed when a ball enters, and
When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the first variation display (variation display of the special symbol) is performed, and after the first variation display, the first result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery. 1st display means (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the first display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and, as the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
A normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state) in which the winning probability in the first lottery is a predetermined first probability, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the second lottery in the normal gaming state. Advantageous gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state),
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability. A second advantageous gaming state (a time-saving gaming state after hitting probability) is provided, which makes it easy for the player to enter.
When the second lottery is performed during the first advantageous gaming state and a predetermined lottery result (loss with a short time) that constitutes a part of the lottery result different from the winning is selected, the first A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to shift from the advantageous gaming state of the above to the second advantageous gaming state.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the features 70 and 71, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably generating a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. That is, in addition to providing a winning easy game state, a normal game state, and a first advantageous game state as game states that can be generated by the game state control means, a second advantageous game state is provided as another advantageous game state. A gaming state is provided, and during the first advantageous gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first advantageous gaming state shifts to the second advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the player is provided with a game property that smoothly shifts from the first advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion without going through the winning easy game state. be able to.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to the features 70 and 71.
When the second lottery is performed in the normal gaming state and the predetermined lottery result (loss with a short time) is selected, the winning probabilities of the first lottery and the second lottery are the same as those in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to shift from the normal gaming state to a gaming state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the second starting portion.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 72, in the normal gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state, the winning probabilities of the first lottery and the second lottery are the same when the same conditions are satisfied, and the player goes to the second starting unit. It shifts to an advantageous gaming state in which the gaming ball can easily enter. Therefore, when a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states are provided, it is easy for the player to understand the transition conditions to the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to easily standardize the control of the gaming state.

<Feature 73>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 70 to 72.
When a predetermined transition condition (condition for ending the time-saving gaming state after hitting via latency due to the number of time-saving times) is satisfied after the transition to the second advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state is changed from the second advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to an advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 73, the winning easy gaming state as the second advantageous gaming state is returned to the original first advantageous gaming state when a predetermined transition condition such as the number of time reductions is satisfied. Therefore, it is easy to dispel the monotonous feeling caused by the continuation of the first advantageous gaming state for a long time, and the gaming property in which the gaming state smoothly shifts between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. Can be provided.

<Feature 80>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and takes a state in which it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery when the game ball enters. The second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) where (special symbol lottery) is performed, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
An output means (frame light emitting device 271-275) capable of outputting a predetermined output, and
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means and output control in the output means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the second lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
A gaming state in which a transition is made when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state, and after the transition, the second lottery returns to the normal gaming state when a lottery result different from the winning result is consecutive for the predetermined first number of times. Therefore, when the first lottery is won, the advantageous gaming state in which the period in which the second starting portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter is set to a second time length longer than the first time length ( Low probability time saving game state), and
In the transition condition, the predetermined first information (the number of times auxiliary flag in the ON state) is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the other lottery result is continuously obtained the predetermined second number of times by the second lottery. At least holds when the result information corresponding to the result is displayed,
The game state control means
In the situation where the first information is stored in the storage unit, when the transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is performed, and the normal gaming state is returned after the advantageous gaming state, the normal gaming state Control is performed so that the predetermined second information (the number of times auxiliary flag in the off state) is stored in the storage unit.
When the second lottery is won in the normal gaming state in which the second information is stored in the storage unit (when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery), the first information is stored in the storage unit. Control
The display control means
Control to change the mode of the output means to the first mode (lights up in blue) when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off in the normal gaming state in which the first information is stored in the storage unit. And run
When the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off in the normal gaming state in which the second information is stored in the storage unit, the mode of the output means is different from that of the first mode. A gaming machine characterized by executing control to make a mode (blinking red).

<Feature 81>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and takes a state in which it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery when the game ball enters. The second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) where (special symbol lottery) is performed, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
An output means (frame light emitting device 271-275) capable of outputting a predetermined output, and
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means and output control in the output means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the second lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
A first game state that occurs after the end of the easy-to-win game state, in which the winning probability in the second lottery is the same as the first probability or a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability. Advantageous gaming state (probability changing gaming state) and
A gaming state in which a transition is made when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state, and after the transition, the second lottery returns to the normal gaming state when a lottery result different from the winning result is consecutive for the predetermined first number of times. The second advantage is that, when the first lottery is won, the period during which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter is set to a second time length longer than the first time length. A game state (low probability time saving game state) is provided,
In the transition condition, the predetermined first information (the number of times auxiliary flag in the ON state) is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the other lottery result is continuously obtained the predetermined second number of times by the second lottery. At least holds when the result information corresponding to the result is displayed,
The game state control means
When the transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the first information is stored in the storage unit, the second advantageous gaming state is entered, and the normal gaming state is returned after the second advantageous gaming state. , Control is performed so that predetermined second information (number of times auxiliary flag in the off state) is stored in the storage unit in the normal game state.
When the second lottery is won in the normal game state in which the second information is stored in the storage unit (when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery), the first information is stored in the storage unit. Control and
The display control means
Control to change the mode of the output means to the first mode (lights up in blue) when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off in the normal gaming state in which the first information is stored in the storage unit. And run
When the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off in the normal gaming state in which the second information is stored in the storage unit, the mode of the output means is different from that of the first mode. A gaming machine characterized by executing control to make a mode (blinking red).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the features 80 and 81, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of identifying the internal state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on. That is, a first starting unit in which a predetermined first lottery is performed when the game ball enters and a second starting unit in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different are provided. The second starting unit is in a state where it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery is performed when the game ball enters. When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the display means displays the variation by the control by the display control means, and after the variation display, the result information corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. NS. Further, an output means capable of outputting a predetermined output is provided, and the output control in the output means is also performed by the display control means. The game state control means at least controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning section that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters. To execute control to generate a plurality of types of gaming states.

In such a gaming machine, as gaming states that can be generated by the gaming state control means, a winning easy gaming state, a normal gaming state, and an advantageous gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) that occur when a player wins in the second lottery. Is provided.

The advantageous gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) occurs when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the normal gaming state, and after the occurrence, a lottery result different from the winning result is determined in the second lottery. It is a gaming state that returns to the normal gaming state when the first number of times is continuous. Further, in the advantageous gaming state (second advantageous gaming state), the period (or the expected value of the length of the period) in which the second starting unit is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is determined. It is a gaming state in which the second time length is longer than the first time length in the normal gaming state. The transition condition is that the first information is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the second lottery displays information corresponding to the other lottery result for the second consecutive predetermined lottery result different from the winning result. At least holds.

When the second advantageous gaming state occurs when the first information is stored in the storage unit, the second information is stored in the storage unit by the control by the game state control means. On the other hand, when the second lottery is won when the second information is stored in the storage unit, the first information is stored in the storage unit under the control of the game state control means.

That is, in the normal game state after the second advantageous game state is generated by the second consecutive lottery result different from the winning in the second lottery, the second information is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, in the normal gaming state after the occurrence of the second advantageous gaming state, if another lottery result is consecutive for the second time by the second lottery, the control to continue the normal gaming state without satisfying the transition condition. It can be performed. It is possible to provide a game property in which a second advantageous gaming state is not generated even if a lottery result different from the winning result is generated a second time in a row in the second lottery during the normal gaming state.

Here, when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off in the normal gaming state in which the first information is stored in the storage unit, the mode of the output means is the first by the control by the display control means. It is said to be the aspect of. On the other hand, when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off in the normal gaming state in which the second information is stored in the storage unit, the mode of the output means is changed to the first mode by the control by the display control means. It is a second aspect different from the aspect of.

This makes it possible to identify whether the information stored in the storage unit is the first information or the second information when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, depending on the mode of the output means. Therefore, when the power is turned on to a plurality of gaming machines in a predetermined situation such as before the opening of the hall, the employees of the hall or the like can store the stored contents of the storage unit in each gaming machine (that is, the first information in the storage unit). Which of the second information is stored) can be distinguished by the mode of the output means, and it is possible to facilitate operations such as initialization as necessary.

The "mode" of the gaming machine according to the features 80 and 81 is not necessarily limited to the mode of visual output by the light emitting body such as color and lighting state (lighting, blinking, etc.), such as rotation and slide movement. The mode of the output may be recognizable through the movement of the above, the mode of the output may be the mode of the output through the auditory sense by sound, and the mode of the output is accompanied by a temporal change such as a change pattern. It may be a combination of two or more kinds of output modes. Further, either the first aspect or the second aspect may be an aspect in which the output means is non-output, such as an aspect in which the light emitting body does not emit light or a mode in which no sound is output.

Further, the first aspect of the gaming machine according to the features 80 and 81 may be an aspect of the gaming machine (a mode of demo display) in a situation where the player is not playing a game in the conventional gaming machine. The second aspect may be an aspect in which the light emitting body that emits light in the demo display does not emit light. Further, of the first aspect and the second aspect, one aspect is a cold color (for example, blue or green), and the other aspect is a light emission mode with a warm color (for example, red or yellow). May be.

Further, the storage unit in the gaming machine according to the features 80 and 81 may be configured by a storage unit that stores dedicated information such as a flag that can determine whether the transition condition is satisfied before or after the transition condition is satisfied. , It may be composed of a storage unit that stores information used for other functions such as a counter that counts the number of fluctuations displayed as a predetermined transition condition.

<Feature 82>
The gaming machine according to the feature 80 and 81.
A first operating means provided at a position where a player playing the gaming machine can operate, and
It is provided with a second operating means provided at a position where the player who plays the gaming machine cannot operate the gaming machine.
When the mode of the output means is the second aspect due to the power of the gaming machine being turned on, the display control means is a predetermined first operation or the second operation with respect to the first operating means. When a predetermined second operation is performed on the operating means, a control for changing the mode of the output means to a predetermined mode (lighting off, first mode) different from the second mode is executed.
The game state control means
When the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off while the second information is stored in the storage unit, and the second operation is performed, the first information is stored. While storing in the storage unit, the control for generating the normal gaming state is executed, and the operation is performed.
If the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off while the second information is stored in the storage unit, and the second operation is not performed, the second information is stored. A gaming machine characterized in that control for generating the normal gaming state is executed while being stored in a storage unit.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 82, when the mode of the output means is the second aspect due to the power of the gaming machine being turned on, that is, the game is played in a state where the second information is stored in the storage unit. When the power of the machine is turned off and then turned on, the first operating means provided at a position where the player playing the game machine can be operated is operated, or the player is able to operate the machine. In any case where the second operating means provided at the inoperable position is operated, the mode of the output means is changed to a predetermined mode different from the second mode by the control by the display control means. do.

Further, if the second operating means is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned off after the power of the gaming machine is turned off while the second information is stored in the storage unit, control by the gaming state controlling means is performed. As a result, a normal gaming state in which the first information is stored in the storage unit is generated. On the other hand, if the second operating means is not operated when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off while the second information is stored in the storage unit, it is controlled by the gaming state controlling means. , A normal gaming state occurs in which the second information is stored in the storage unit.

Therefore, when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is turned off with the second information stored in the storage unit, a person other than the player, such as a hall employee, operates the second operating means. Then, when a lottery result different from the winning in the second lottery is continuously selected, a normal gaming state capable of generating a second advantageous gaming state occurs, and the mode of the output means is the second. It can be changed to a predetermined mode different from the mode of. This makes it easy to prevent the game from starting from the normal game state due to a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is turned off with the second information stored in the storage unit, if the first operating means is operated, a lottery result different from the winning result is obtained. A normal gaming state that does not shift to the second advantageous gaming state occurs even if the game is continuously selected a number of times, and the mode of the output means changes to a predetermined mode different from the second mode. Therefore, some of the gaming machines from the plurality of gaming machines that have taken the second aspect have the second aspect, and the rest have the first or second operating means operated to obtain the predetermined aspect. It is possible to take measures according to the policy of the amusement park (hall). As a result, the player can use the mode of the output means as an index when selecting the gaming machine to play the game, and the interest in selecting the gaming machine can be amplified.

In addition, the player can select and operate the gaming machine of the second aspect that he / she is interested in, and then select whether or not to change the gaming machine to a predetermined aspect according to his / her own will. As a result, the player can be given a degree of freedom to change the mode of the output means with respect to the state of the game, and the degree of freedom of operation with respect to the game machine can be increased.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 82, the "predetermined aspect different from the second aspect" may be the first aspect, which is different from the first aspect and the second aspect. Further, the predetermined mode may be the same mode when the first operation is performed and the case where the second operation is performed, or may be different modes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 82, "when the gaming state control means is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is cut off while the second information is stored in the storage unit". If the second operation is not performed even if the first operation is performed, the control for generating the normal gaming state is executed while the second information is stored in the storage unit. " May be good.

<Feature 90>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and takes a state in which it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery when the game ball enters. The second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) where (special symbol lottery) is performed, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the second lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit plays a game. An approach advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is provided, in which the period during which the ball is easily entered is set to a second time length longer than the first time length.
The game state control means
When the second lottery is performed during the normal game state and a predetermined lottery result (loss with a short time) that constitutes a part of the lottery result different from the winning is selected, the game shifts to the approach advantageous game state. Means to make
After the transition to the approach advantageous gaming state, when the winning and the lottery results different from the predetermined lottery results are consecutive for the predetermined first number of times by the second lottery, the means for returning to the normal gaming state.
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous game state, the number of times from the start of the approach advantageous game state to the return to the normal game state is not changed. Equipped with a means to make the number of times
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state and the number of times is not changed, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second lottery during the normal gaming state. The same result information as when selected is displayed,
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state and the number of times is not changed, the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result corresponds to the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that another mode display means for displaying different display modes is provided.

<Feature 91>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and takes a state in which it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery when the game ball enters. The second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) where (special symbol lottery) is performed, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the second lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
A high probability that the winning probability in the second lottery is the same as the first probability or a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability in the gaming state that occurs after the end of the easy-to-win game state. Advantageous game state (probability change game state) and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit plays a game. An approach advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is provided, in which the period during which the ball is easily entered is set to a second time length longer than the first time length.
The game state control means
When the second lottery is performed during the normal game state and a predetermined lottery result (loss with a short time) that constitutes a part of the lottery result different from the winning is selected, the game shifts to the approach advantageous game state. Means to make
After the transition to the approach advantageous gaming state, when the winning and the lottery results different from the predetermined lottery results are consecutive for the predetermined first number of times by the second lottery, the means for returning to the normal gaming state.
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous game state, the number of times from the start of the approach advantageous game state to the return to the normal game state is not changed. Equipped with a means to make the number of times
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state and the number of times is not changed, the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second lottery during the normal gaming state. The same result information as when selected is displayed,
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state and the number of times is not changed, the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result corresponds to the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that another mode display means for displaying different display modes is provided.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machines described in the features 90 and 91, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling the display of the lottery result displayed when shifting from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. .. That is, a first starting unit in which a predetermined first lottery is performed when the game ball enters and a second starting unit in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different are provided. The second starting unit is in a state where it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery is performed when the game ball enters. When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the display means displays the variation by the control by the display control means, and after the variation display, the result information corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. NS. The game state control means at least controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning section that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters. Then, control to generate a plurality of types of gaming states is executed.

In such a gaming machine, as gaming states that can be generated by the gaming state control means, a winning easy gaming state, a normal gaming state, and an approach advantageous gaming state that occur when a player wins in the second lottery are provided.

The approach advantageous gaming state occurs when a predetermined lottery result different from the winning is selected by the second lottery during the normal gaming state, and the predetermined first variation display is executed after the occurrence. In some cases, the game state may return to the normal game state, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is the first time length in the normal game state. It is a gaming state with a second time length longer than that.

In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state, the game state control means controls from the start of the approach advantageous gaming state to the return to the normal gaming state. The number of times is not changed and remains the first time.
It may be changed to a number different from the first number.

Here, when a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state, the result information having the same content as when the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the normal gaming state is obtained. Is displayed. Therefore, most of the control until the predetermined lottery result is selected and the result information is displayed can be shared between the normal game state and the approach advantageous game state to simplify the control.

Further, when a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state, the display mode of the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is different from that in the normal gaming state by another mode display means. Is displayed. Therefore, during the normal game state, the player visually recognizes the display of the predetermined result information to enter the approach advantageous game state in which the number of times is set to the first number by selecting the predetermined lottery result in the normal game state. The transition can be made recognizable by the player.

On the other hand, when the predetermined result information is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state, the display mode of the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is different from that in the normal gaming state by another mode display means. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the display of the predetermined result information during the approach advantageous gaming state, it is possible to easily recognize that the situation is different from that during the normal gaming state.

That is, when a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the normal gaming state, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize the transition to the approaching advantageous gaming state, while the approaching advantageous gaming state. Even if a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the situation is different from that in the normal gaming state.

As a result, when a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous game state, the first counting is started again from the initial value because the predetermined lottery result is selected. Despite the absence, the player recognizes the predetermined result information, whereby the lottery result different from the winning is continuously selected as in the case where the predetermined lottery result in the normal gaming state is selected. It is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the possible number of times starts from the initial value of the first number of times.

As described above, according to the gaming machines described in the features 90 and 91, a predetermined lottery result that triggers the transition of the gaming state to the approaching advantageous gaming state when selected in the normal gaming state is selected in the approaching advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suitably control the display of the lottery result when the lottery is performed.

<Feature A0>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and takes a state in which it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery when the game ball enters. The second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) where (special symbol lottery) is performed, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the second lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit plays a game. An approach advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is provided, in which the period during which the ball is easily entered is set to a second time length longer than the first time length.
When the second lottery is performed during the normal game state and a predetermined lottery result (loss with a short time) that constitutes a part of the lottery result different from the winning is selected, the game shifts to the approach advantageous game state. Means to make
After the transition to the approach advantageous gaming state, when the winning and the lottery results different from the predetermined lottery results are consecutive for the predetermined first number of times by the second lottery, the means for returning to the normal gaming state.
When a predetermined change condition is satisfied during the approach advantageous gaming state, the number of times from the start of the approach advantageous gaming state to the return to the normal gaming state is set to a number different from the first number of times. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

<Feature A1>
The first starting unit (starting devices 436A, 436B) in which a predetermined first lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and takes a state in which it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery when the game ball enters. The second starting part (lower starting winning device 432) where (special symbol lottery) is performed, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying fluctuations when a game ball enters the second starting portion and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery after the fluctuation display.
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that executes display control in the display means, and
A variable winning unit (large winning device 433) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters.
A game state control means (main control board) that controls at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. 920) and a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state (special game state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the second lottery is won.
The winning probability in the second lottery is set to a predetermined first probability, and the period in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won is a predetermined first first. The normal game state (first normal game state, second normal game state), which is the time length, and
A high probability that the winning probability in the second lottery is the same as the first probability or a predetermined second probability higher than the first probability in the gaming state that occurs after the end of the easy-to-win game state. Advantageous game state (probability change game state) and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit plays a game. An approach advantageous gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is provided, in which the period during which the ball is easily entered is set to a second time length longer than the first time length.
When the second lottery is performed during the normal game state and a predetermined lottery result (loss with a short time) that constitutes a part of the lottery result different from the winning is selected, the game shifts to the approach advantageous game state. Means to make
After the transition to the approach advantageous gaming state, when the winning and the lottery results different from the predetermined lottery results are consecutive for the predetermined first number of times by the second lottery, the means for returning to the normal gaming state.
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the approach advantageous gaming state, the number of times from the start of the approach advantageous gaming state to the return to the normal gaming state is referred to as the first number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the number of times to be different.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and when a big hit is won by the lottery, a special game state is set and the game ball is a big winning opening. It is known that a large number of prizes can be won (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1898773). In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to generate a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are established according to the conditions established as the game progresses. The game is diversified by making it possible to switch between.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine configured so that the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be generated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably diversifying the end time of a predetermined advantageous gaming state. That is, a first starting unit in which a predetermined first lottery is performed when the game ball enters and a second starting unit in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different are provided. The second starting unit is in a state where it is easy to enter when the first lottery is won, and a predetermined second lottery is performed when the game ball enters. When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the display means displays the variation by the control by the display control means, and after the variation display, the result information corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. NS. The game state control means at least controls the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning section that gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters. Then, control to generate a plurality of types of gaming states is executed.

In such a gaming machine, as gaming states that can be generated by the gaming state control means, a winning easy gaming state, a normal gaming state, and an approach advantageous gaming state that occur when a player wins in the second lottery are provided.

The approach advantageous gaming state occurs when a predetermined lottery result different from the winning is selected by the second lottery during the normal gaming state, and the predetermined first variation display is executed after the occurrence. In some cases, the game state may return to the normal game state, and the period (or the expected value of the length of the period) in which the second starting unit is in a state where the game ball can easily enter when the first lottery is won. Is a gaming state in which the second time length is longer than the first time length.

In such a gaming machine, if the number of times to return to the normal gaming state by the number-of-times changing means is different from the first number during the approach-advantageous gaming state, the variation display that is the end condition in the approach-advantageous gaming state is displayed. The number of executions changes.

That is, the number of times of execution of the variable display which is the end condition in the approach advantageous game state is reduced by the means for changing the number of times, the end time of the approach advantageous game state is earlier, or the number of executions of the variable display which is the end condition of the approach advantageous game state is reduced. It is possible to add a game property such that the end time of the approach advantageous game state is delayed by increasing the number, and the approach advantageous game state can be suitably diversified.

<Feature A2>
The gaming machine according to the feature A0 or A1.
The display control means
When the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the normal gaming state, the predetermined result corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed at the timing of displaying the result information after the variation display. The information display is recognizable to the player,
In the approach advantageous gaming state, when the approach advantageous gaming state is set to a number longer than the first number by the number of times changing means, the predetermined result is displayed at the timing of displaying the result information after the variation display. A gaming machine characterized in that information is displayed so that the player can recognize it.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A2, when a predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery during the normal gaming state, the result information is displayed after the variable display by the control by the display control means. , The display of the predetermined result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result becomes recognizable to the player.

Further, during the approach advantageous game state, when it is selected by the means for changing the number of times that the approach advantageous game state is set to a longer number of times than the first number and the number of executions of the variation display which is the end condition of the approach advantageous game state is increased. In addition, by the control by the display control means, the player can recognize the display of the predetermined result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result even at the timing of displaying the result information after the variable display.

Therefore, in the normal game state and the approach advantageous game state, the situation in which the approach advantageous game state is generated or extended so as to be advantageous to the player can be displayed by displaying a common predetermined lottery result. Can be recognized by. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily guess that a predetermined lottery result is selected during the approach advantageous gaming state and a lottery result for shifting to a preferable state similar to the normal gaming state is obtained.

<Feature A3>
Features A gaming machine according to any one of A0 to A3.
The display control means
When the approach advantageous gaming state is selected to be continued by the number-of-times changing means, a control for displaying a predetermined effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that when it is selected to end the approach advantageous gaming state by the number-of-times changing means, a control for displaying an effect different from the predetermined effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A3, it is possible to make the player estimate the length of the approach advantageous gaming state changed by the number-of-times changing means depending on the content of the produced effect. In particular, there is a difference between the case where it is selected not to end the approach advantageous gaming state (that is, the continuation of the approach advantageous gaming state) by the number of times changing means and the case where it is selected to end the approach advantageous gaming state. Since the effect is made to appear, the former case and the latter case can be distinguished by the effect and the player can guess. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from misidentifying that the approach advantageous game state is continued even though the approach advantageous game state is terminated.

<Feature A4>
A gaming machine according to any one of feature A1 to feature A3.
The display control means
When it is selected by the number-of-times changing means to increase the number of times the variation display is executed, which is the end condition of the approach advantageous gaming state, a control for displaying a predetermined effect is executed.
When it is selected not to change the number of executions of the variable display, which is the end condition, or to reduce the number of executions of the variable display by the number-of-times changing means, an effect different from the predetermined effect is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by executing control to be issued.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A4, it is possible to make the player estimate the length of the approach advantageous gaming state which is changed by the number-of-times changing means depending on the content of the produced effect. In particular, when it is selected to increase the number of executions of the variable display which is the end condition of the approach advantageous gaming state by the number of times changing means, and when the number of executions of the variable display which is the end condition is not changed or the variable display is performed. Since a different effect is displayed depending on whether it is selected to reduce the number of times of execution of the above, the former case and the latter case can be distinguished by the effect and the player can guess. As a result, even though the number of executions of the variable display which is the end condition of the approach advantageous gaming state is reduced or does not change, it is preferably suppressed that the player misunderstands that the number of executions of the variable display which is the end condition is increased. can.

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to A4 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: A launch operation means operated by a player, a game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a passage portion. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and gives a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each of the gaming parts.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

100 ... Game machine, 330 ... Launch device, 400, 700 ... Game board, 401, 720 ... Base, 420, 710 ... Central structure, 432 ... Lower start winning device, 433 ... Large winning device, 436A, 436B ... Starting device , 471,472 ... Special symbol display device, 473 ... Ordinary symbol display device, 641,642,661,662,741,742,761,762 ... Ball passage, 701,702 ... Flow area, 711,712,713 ... Opening, 920 ... Main control board, 940 ... Sub control board

Claims (2)

The first starting part where a predetermined first lottery is performed when a game ball enters, and
It is a second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and when the first lottery is won, the second starting unit is made easy to enter the game ball and the game is played. A second starting part where a predetermined second lottery is performed when a ball enters, and
When the game ball enters the second starting portion, the first variation display is performed, and after the first variation display, the first display that can display the first result information corresponding to the result of the second lottery is displayed. Means and
A display control means that executes display control in the first display means, and
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for controlling at least the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states is provided. As the game state,
An easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the player wins in the second lottery.
A normal gaming state in which the winning probability in the first lottery is a predetermined first probability, and
The winning probability in the first lottery is the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is a predetermined probability higher than the winning probability in the second lottery in the normal gaming state. Advantageous gaming state and
The winning probability in the first lottery is defined as the first probability, and the winning probability in the second lottery is defined as the predetermined probability. A second advantageous gaming state, which is easy for players to enter, is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the first advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images